JP6652076B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As one type of gaming machine, there is a slot machine. The slot machine has a plurality of reels, and a part of a plurality of symbols provided on an outer peripheral portion of each reel is configured to be visible through a display window. Then, when the player bets a game medium such as a medal and operates a start lever, each reel starts rotating, and after each reel starts rotating, each stop is sequentially stopped by operating a stop button. .

  In addition, inside the slot machine, a lottery is performed on condition that a game medium bet and the operation of the start lever are operated, and the result of the lottery is a winning, and a symbol in which a player is won on a preset effective line is displayed. A predetermined number of game media may be paid out on condition that the game media is stopped (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-045989 A

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the slot machine, but also applies to, for example, a gaming machine using a game ball as a game medium.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is a state transition unit that transitions a game state between a plurality of types of game states having different degrees of advantage,
Second situation setting means for setting the game situation to the second situation based on the occurrence of the specific event in the first situation;
With
It is a configuration that can stay in the second situation in a plurality of types of gaming states,
The gaming machine executes a profit giving process corresponding to the gaming state at that time in a predetermined trigger game that is the first game started in the second situation set for the occurrence of the specific event. A processing execution means,
The game state at the time when the specific event occurs in the first situation may be different from the game state at the time of the predetermined trigger game in the second situation set based on the occurrence of the specific event. Yes,
It said processing execution means gaming state in the predetermined trigger game be a specific game state, and wherein the application of benefit in the benefit-imparting treatment is configured to prevent determined.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the slot machine according to the first embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine showing the state where the front door was opened. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the pattern which can be visually recognized from a display window part, and a combination line. It is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a winning mode and a privilege to be given. FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area, and FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of information corresponding to a stop order displayed on the dual-purpose display unit. (A), (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in the image display device and the display content of the stop order in the dual-purpose display unit. FIG. 3 is an electrical configuration diagram of the slot machine. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a main process executed by a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by the main side MPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a normal process executed by a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process of the combination performed by the main side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for normal states, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for BB state. It is a flowchart which shows the reel control processing performed by the main side MPU. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state existing in the slot machine. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the winning data set to the index value = 7 in the lottery table for a normal state, (b) It sets to index value = 7 in the lottery table for the state after a bonus. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the winning data that has been set, and (c) an explanation for explaining the contents of the winning data set to index values = 7 to 13 in the lottery table for the first preparation state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the winning data set to the index value = 7 to 13 in the lottery table for the second preparation state, and (e) a lottery table for the RT state. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing the contents of winning data set with an index value = 7 in FIG. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of a reel when the lottery table for 1st preparation state is selected, and the winning mode established, (b) The lottery table for 2nd preparation state FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a relationship between a reel stop order and a winning mode that is established when is selected. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that shift to RT state occurs in relation to a game section. (A)-(f) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the transfer lottery process to RT state is performed. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st table for normal states, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd table for normal states, (c) It explains the table for various states. (D) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table for an RT state, and (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table for a first BB state. It is a flowchart which shows the response processing at the time of the end of a game performed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the normal state process performed by the main side MPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating post-bonus state processing executed by the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st preparation state process performed by a main side MPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a second preparation state process executed by a main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control process performed by the main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows information processing performed by production side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows RT state processing performed by a main side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the point value and setting value set to each combination in the case of performing the lottery process of a combination in a normal state, and (b) of the combination in the 1st BB state. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the point value set to each combination in the case where a lottery process is performed, and a setting value, (c) When the lottery process of a role is performed in 2nd BB state It is an explanatory view for explaining the relation between the point value set for each combination and the set value. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing of the game area | region performed by a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the transition trigger process of RT state performed by a main side MPU. (A)-(i) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the transfer lottery process to RT state is performed in a normal state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for BB performed by a main side MPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a first BB process executed by a main MPU. (A)-(i) It is a time chart for demonstrating the progress content of a game when 1st BB state occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 2BB performed by the main side MPU. (A)-(i) It is a time chart for demonstrating the progress content of a game when 2nd BB state occurs. It is a flowchart which shows the end process of the advantageous section performed by the main side MPU. (A)-(i) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the advantageous section is forcibly ended in relation to the number of continuous games of the advantageous section. (A)-(h) A time chart showing a state in which the transition to the RT state occurs in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of opportunity games, and the advantageous section is forcibly terminated. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the process for management performed by a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for illuminations performed by the main side MPU. (A), (b) It is a time chart which shows the relationship between the opening angle of a front door, and the control state of an illuminating device. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of the illumination device when a front door is an open state and the opening angle is below a predetermined opening angle, (b) The opening angle of a front door is a predetermined | prescribed angle. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the state of the illuminating device when it is the maximum opening angle exceeding the opening angle. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the combination of the winning data and point value set to each of the index value = 7-13 of the 2nd preparation state in 2nd Embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a relationship between a reel stop order and a winning mode to be established when a winning is achieved with an index value of 8 to 13 in a second preparation state. This is a situation in which the transition zone to the RT state is satisfied at the same time as the second preparation state in the advantageous section. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the reel display order is notified on the image display device when the index value = 10 is won in a situation where the number of games is less than the number of trigger games. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control process performed by the main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows information processing performed by production side MPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a second preparation state process executed by a main MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for normal states in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition trigger process of RT state performed by a main side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 1st table for normal states, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the 2nd table for normal states, (c) It explains the table for various states. (D) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a table for an RT state. It is a flowchart which shows the termination process of the advantageous section performed by the main side MPU in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition trigger process of RT state performed by the main side MPU in 5th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows control processing of a game section performed by a main MPU in a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transition trigger process of RT state performed by a main side MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the end processing of the advantageous section performed by the main side MPU in a 7th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correspondence of the combination of the symbol which becomes a prize in 8th Embodiment, and the privilege provided when a prize is won. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the lottery table for normal states. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the stop order of a reel and the winning pattern established when the lottery table for a normal state is selected. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the winning data set to the index value = 9 in the lottery table for a normal state, (b) It sets to the index value = 9 in the lottery table for the state after a bonus. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the winning data that has been set, and (c) an explanation for explaining the contents of the winning data set to the index value = 9 to 15 in the lottery table for the first preparation state. It is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the winning data set to the index value = 9 to 15 in the lottery table for the second preparation state, and (e) a lottery table for the RT state. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for describing the content of winning data set with an index value = 9 in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the notification control process performed by the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the end process of the advantageous section performed by the main side MPU.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 opened, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the housing 11.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape opened forward as a whole by fixing a plurality of wooden panels.

  A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 as shown in FIGS. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so that the inner space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed by using a shaft portion 12a provided on the left side thereof as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back surface of the front door 12. This locked state is released by an unlocking operation of the key cylinder 14 with a predetermined key.

  A game panel 20 is provided near the center of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. In the gaming panel 20, three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, 21R are formed so as to be arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, 21R are formed of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

  As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is mounted on an upper portion of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R formed in a cylindrical shape, respectively. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are disposed on the same axis extending substantially in the horizontal direction, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R on a one-to-one basis. I have. Therefore, a part of the surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is in a state where it can be visually recognized through the corresponding display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20. When the start lever 41 is operated while game media such as medals and virtual medals are bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating at the same time.

  On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 which are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are respectively disposed immediately below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 is in a state where it can be stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

  The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44. Until the execution of various processes such as the provision of the game and the management of the game state are completed, this corresponds to one game (game time).

  On the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting a medal as an investment value is provided. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to a hopper device 53 by a selector 52 provided on the back surface of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and when the reception is prohibited. It is guided to a medal tray 59 from a medal discharge opening 58 provided at the lower front part of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal tray 59 through the medal outlet 58 when a winning corresponding to the provision of the game medium is established on the activated line. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided below the medal slot 45 when the medal inserted into the medal slot 45 is jammed in the selector 52. Further, on the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R, a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, and two virtual medals are inserted at a time. And a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

  On the left side of the start lever 41, a settlement button 51 is provided. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as a virtual medal until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement button 51 is operated in the state where the data is stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 58 as a real medal.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a power supply device 54 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 53 inside the housing 11. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 operated at the time of power-on or power-off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting state of the slot machine 10 from “Setting 1” to “Setting 1”. And a setting key insertion hole 57 operated to change the setting within the range of “setting 6”.

  Next, the symbols attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

  FIG. 4 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the center reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, 20 symbols are arranged in a line. Also, numbers are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R from "0" to "19". These numbers are in a state where the main controller 70 can be visually recognized from the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. Are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the following description will be made using the numbers.

  As the symbols, a "bell" symbol (for example, the nineteenth on the left reel 32L), a "watermelon" symbol (for example, the eighteenth on the left reel 32L), a "cherry" symbol (for example, the seventeenth on the left reel 32L), " "Replay" symbol (for example, 16th of left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (for example, 15th of left reel 32L), "LUCKKY" symbol (for example, 13th of left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol ( For example, there are eight types of symbols: a twelfth left reel 32L) and a "white 7" symbol (for example, the tenth left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 4, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

  FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R. Each of the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the twenty symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are such that the entire symbol is visible. Therefore, in a state where all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols become visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

  In the slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect the positions where the symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started in a state in which a predetermined number of game media have been bet, and if a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of providing the game media, Either the benefit of re-game or the transition of game state is given.

  That is, in the slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line in which a winning can be established. The main line ML is set as a line extending straight. Therefore, the sub-line SL1 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the upper symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. The connected sub-line SL2, the lower design of the left reel 32L, the lower design of the middle reel 32M, and the lower design of the right reel 32R, the lower design of the left reel 32L, the middle design of the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. Even if a combination of symbols to be won is formed on a line extending in a straight line such as a sub-line SL4 connecting the upper symbols, no winning is realized.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, a description will be given of a correspondence relationship between a winning symbol combination and a bonus granted in the event of winning. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be awarded and a privilege to be awarded when a winning is achieved.

  There are bell winning, watermelon winning and cherry winning as small role prize in which the game media is provided. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol. In this case, a bell will be won. In the case of a bell prize, the number of game media to be provided is “11”. On the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “watermelon” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “watermelon” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “watermelon” symbol, a watermelon prize is won. Becomes When a watermelon prize is won, the number of game media to be provided is “7”. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “cherry” symbol on the main line ML, a cherry win is achieved regardless of which of the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R. When a cherry prize is won, the number of game media to be provided is “2”.

  The prize to which the replay privilege that allows the player to play the next game without betting the game medium is given includes a normal replay prize, a first promotion replay prize, and a second promotion replay prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “replay” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “replay” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “replay” symbol. In this case, a replay is usually won. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol, or When the stop symbol on the left reel 32L is a “replay” symbol on the line ML, the stop symbol on the middle reel 32M is a “replay” symbol, and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is a “bell” symbol, the first promotion is performed. Replay wins. On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “replay” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “replay” symbol, or When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol on the line ML, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the second promotion is performed. Replay wins.

  If any of the above-mentioned replay prizes is won, a re-game privilege that allows the player to play a game of the next game without making a bet on a game medium is given. Specifically, if any of the replay prizes is won in the game in which the game medium of “3” is bet, the betting of the game medium is unnecessary and the next game is bet in a state where the game medium of “3” is bet. It is possible to start a game.

  Among the various replay winnings, the first promoted replay winning and the second promoted replay winning are not only triggers for granting the replay winning privilege but also trigger transition of the gaming state. Specifically, when the first promotion replay prize is established in the first preparation state ST4, the gaming state is changed to the second preparation state ST5 in which the winning probability of the role that can establish the replay prize is higher than in the first preparation state ST4. The game state shifts to the RT state ST6 in which, when the second promotion replay winning is achieved in the second preparation state ST5, the winning probability of the role that can achieve the replay winning is higher than in the second preparation state ST5. The details of each of these game states will be described later.

  The state transition prize in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed includes a first BB prize, a second BB prize, and an SB prize. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “red 7” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “red 7” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is “red 7”. In the case of a symbol, a first BB prize is won. On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "white 7" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "white 7" symbol. , A second BB winning. On the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “LUCKY” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “BAR” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “BAR” symbol, an SB winning is achieved. Becomes

  When the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state ST2. The BB state ST2 is a game state in which the expected number of game media to be provided per unit game is higher than the game states other than the BB state ST2. More specifically, a winning combination that enables the formation of a bell prize is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.5) than in other gaming states, and when the winning combination is won, each reel 32L is used. , 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the bell prize is established. The BB state ST2 continues over a plurality of games and ends when an end condition is satisfied based on the occurrence of an event according to the content of the game. Although the termination condition is optional, in the slot machine 10, the termination condition is set such that the total number of game media provided after the start of the BB state ST2 becomes equal to or more than the termination reference number (for example, “350”). ing. As the BB state ST2, there are a first BB state to which the first BB prize is established and a second BB state to which the second BB prize is established. The difference between the first BB state and the second BB state will be described later.

  When the SB winning is achieved, the gaming state shifts to the SB state. The SB state is the same as the normal state ST1 in which the RAM 74 of the main control device 70 to be described later stays when the RAM 74 is initialized. This is a gaming state in which the probability is slightly higher than the normal state ST1. Specifically, in the normal state ST1, the probability of a replay winning is about 1 / 7.3, whereas in the SB state, the probability of a replay winning is about 1 / 7.1. That is, the SB state is a gaming state in which the player's advantage is substantially the same as the normal state ST1. The SB state ends with one game. Although the details will be described later, the transition of the game section or the game state occurs when the player wins the SB combination or transitions to the SB state.

  Next, an apparatus for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided above the front door 12 and an image display device 63 is provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and light emission is controlled in a manner corresponding to a winning result. The upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The loudspeakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, sound output is controlled so that a sound or a sound corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound or a sound corresponding to a winning result is provided. Is output so as to be output. The sound output of the speaker 62 is controlled so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

  The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display. However, the image display device 63 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. Another display device having a display surface may be used, or a dot matrix display device may be used. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. The display of the image display device 63 is controlled such that an image corresponding to the winning result of the combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface.

  The game panel 20 of the front door 12 has a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of virtual medals stored and stored at a position below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, and has been awarded at the time of winning a small role. When the number of game media is displayed, and when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63, a display corresponding to the content of the notification is displayed, and the game section is an advantageous section. And an advantageous section display section 67 for performing a display corresponding to. The credit display section 65 is configured by a 7-segment display, and a single-color light-emitting LED such as green is used for each segment.

  FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 provided with a dual-purpose display section 66 and an advantageous section display section 67. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7A, a dual-purpose display section 66 provided by arranging two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b in a horizontal direction and a single light-emitting section And the advantageous section display section 67.

  If any of the small wins (Bell Win, Watermelon Win or Cherry Win) corresponding to the award of the game wins, the game media corresponding to the small win at the end of the game in which the small win has been achieved. Is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. Specifically, when the bell prize is established, “1” is displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b, so that the game medium of “11” is provided. Is notified. When a watermelon winning is achieved, the 7-segment display 66a on the left is hidden and “7” is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right, so that a game medium of “7” is provided. Is notified. When the cherry winning is achieved, the 7-segment display 66a on the left is not displayed and "2" is displayed on the 7-segment display 66b on the right, so that the game medium of "2" is provided. Is notified. On the other hand, even if a winning such as any of the replay winning, any of the BB winning and the SB winning, in which the game medium is not provided, is established, the display corresponding to the winning is not displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. , The seven-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of game media provided on the dual-purpose display section 66 is terminated when a game medium is bet in order to start the next game of the game in which the display has been performed. The devices 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

  When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the notified stop order is displayed on the shared display unit 66. FIG. 7B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R notified by the image display device 63, the first stop is the left reel 32L and the second stop is the middle reel. A stop sequence in which the first stop is 32M, the third stop is the right reel 32R, a stop sequence in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and a first stop. Is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is A stop order in which the left reel 32L is used, a stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R, a second stop is the left reel 32L, and a third stop is the middle reel 32M, and a first stop is the right reel 32R. A stop sequence third stop is the left reel 32L is center reel 32M stop, is present.

  The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 can be executed when a winning combination including the first promotion replay winning data or a winning combination including the second promotion replay winning data is won in the lottery process of the winning combination. More specifically, when the winning combination including the first promotion replay winning data is won, the first promotion is performed when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop sequences. Replay winning is established. Then, when the first promotion replay winning is established, the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5 which is more advantageous to the player than the first preparation state ST4. In addition, when the reel including the second promotion replay winning data is won, if the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders, the second promotion replay prize is won. To establish. Then, when the second promotion replay winning is established, the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6 which is more advantageous to the player than the second preparation state ST5.

  When any of the above stop sequences is notified on the image display device 63, the left seven-segment display 66a in the dual-purpose display unit 66 is kept in a non-display state, while the right seven-segment display 66b is maintained. The display corresponding to the stop sequence of the notification target is performed. The display contents are as shown in FIG. 7B, and the display contents of the stop order of the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set in one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. . However, the present invention is not limited to this. For a configuration in which a plurality of types of display contents of the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set corresponding to some or all of the notification contents of the stop order in the image display device 63. Is also good.

  The display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is different from the display content to be displayed when the display corresponding to the addition of the game medium is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

  FIGS. 8A and 8B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66.

  When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 8A, the number of stop operations required to end the game is displayed on the image display device 63. Are displayed, and image display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each of the unit display images G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8A shows a state in which the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The left unit display image G1 displays the image “2” corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays the image “1” corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. The image of "3" corresponding to the stop sequence of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

  While the image display device 63 displays an image indicating the stop sequence of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, the dual-purpose display unit 66 displays the reels as shown in FIG. “L” corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in each unit display image G1 to G3. While the corresponding image is displayed, the dual-purpose display section 66 performs a display irrespective of the number of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Thereby, even if a display corresponding to the notification content of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, the player can pay attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

  The display range of the dual-purpose display section 66 is smaller than the display range of the image display device 63. From this point as well, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the dual-purpose display unit 66 as compared to the image display device 63. The dual-purpose display section 66 is located on the opposite side of the image display device 63 across the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R that allow the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be viewed. As a result, the dual-purpose display unit 66 is disposed at a position spaced apart from the image display device 63, and thus the player's attention to the dual-purpose display unit 66 can be reduced.

  When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the shared display unit 66 and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 correspond. The display to be performed is started after the lottery process of the winning combination is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is validated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the shared display unit 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, the display may be started simultaneously or almost simultaneously, and the display start order may be reversed. The display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed. Is terminated when the error occurs.

  The dual-purpose display section 66 is arranged on the center side of the common display area 68, while the advantageous section display section 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68. The advantageous section display section 67 is a display section for notifying that the game section is an advantageous section among the normal section and the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a stoppage of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables a player to win a winning when the player wins a winning combination having a different winning depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a section in which the order is notified, or a section in which the transition probability to the RT state ST6, which is a game state advantageous to the player, becomes higher than the normal section. On the other hand, the normal section refers to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable a player to achieve a favorable prize when a prize to be established is won in a different role according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Is a section in which the stop order is not notified, and the transition probability to the RT state ST6, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is lower than the advantageous section. As will be described later in detail, in the slot machine 10, a normal state ST1, a BB state ST2, a post-bonus state ST3, a first preparation state ST4, a second preparation state ST5, and an RT state ST6 are set as the game states. Existing. Each of these game states can stay in the normal section and can stay in the advantageous section. In any game state, the progress of the game differs depending on whether the game section is staying in the normal section or the advantageous section.

  When the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied in the normal section and the transition to the advantageous section is performed, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned on to start the notification that the section is the advantageous section. In addition, when the transition condition to the normal section is satisfied in the advantageous section and the transition to the normal section is performed, the advantageous section display unit 67 is turned off so that the notification of the advantageous section is ended. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall or the like that the section is an advantageous section. Further, the dual-purpose display section 66 provided collectively in the common display area 68 is turned on when game media is provided, turned off at the start of the next game, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Are turned on when the stop order of the game is displayed on the image display device 63, and turned off when the game is over. Accordingly, in a configuration in which the advantageous section display section 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too conspicuous for the player, the advantageous section display section is provided in the common display area 68 when the section is an advantageous section. It is possible to positively cause a situation in which only the 67 is turned on, and it becomes easy for the manager of the gaming hall to check the advantageous section display section 67. Note that, instead of the configuration in which the lighting state of the advantageous section display section 67 is maintained in the advantageous section, a blinking display may be performed on the advantageous section display section 67 at a predetermined cycle in the advantageous section. Further, as the combined display section 66 and the advantageous section display section 67, another display such as a liquid crystal display device may be used.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to a back plate 11 b that forms the back surface of the housing 11. The main control device 70 includes a main control board 71 housed in a board box 81.

  An MPU 72 is mounted on an element mounting surface, which is one plate surface of the main control board 71, as shown in FIG. The substrate box 81 is formed to be transparent so that the MPU 72 accommodated in the substrate box 81 can be viewed from the outside of the substrate box 81. Although the substrate box 81 is formed to be colorless and transparent, the substrate box 81 may be formed to be colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 accommodated in the substrate box 81 can be seen from the outside of the substrate box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11 b of the housing 11 so that the opposing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 71 in the substrate box 81 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, the opposing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 can be viewed and The MPU 72 can be viewed through the opposing wall 82.

  The board box 81 is formed by combining a plurality of case bodies back and forth. The plurality of case bodies are used to prevent separation of these case bodies and to leave traces when separating these case bodies. A coupling portion 83 is provided. A plurality of the coupling portions 83 are arranged in parallel on one side of the substrate box 81 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. Accordingly, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the connection part 83 in a state where the separation of the case body is prevented by using the part of the connection part 83, another connection part 83 Can be prevented from being separated again. In addition, when the case body is separated, the joint portion 83 is broken and its trace remains, so that it is possible to visually check the joint portion 83 to determine whether or not the case body has been illegally separated. Become. Further, a sealing seal 84 is attached to another side of the board box 81 other than the side where the connecting portions 83 are juxtaposed so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave a trace when the seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated.

  In the main control device 70 having the above-described configuration, a plurality of notification display devices 85 to 87 are provided on the main control board 71. Specifically, a first notification display device 85, a second notification display device 86, and a third notification display device 87 are provided. Each of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is a segment display in which seven LED display segments are arranged. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a light emitter, a liquid crystal display device, or an organic EL display. Each of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is installed so that the display surface faces the same direction as the direction in which the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces. Thus, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 housed in the substrate box 81 can be viewed from outside the substrate box 81. As described above, the main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 such that the opposing wall portion 82 of the substrate box 81 facing the element mounting surface of the main control substrate 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, when the front door 12 is opened to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 and the internal space of the housing 11 is exposed to the front of the slot machine 10, the first to The three notification display devices 85 to 87 can be visually observed. The management results of the game history are notified by using the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87. This will be described later in detail.

  The visual check of the main controller 70 is performed by opening the front door 12 with respect to the housing 11 to the front of the slot machine 10. The housing 11 is provided with lighting devices 88a and 88b in order to improve the visibility of the main control device 70 that is opened by opening the front door 12 for visual confirmation. The lighting devices 88a and 88b are provided one by one on the back surface of the left side plate 11c and the back surface of the right side plate 11d of the housing 11 so as to form a pair of right and left. The lighting devices 88a and 88b include high-luminance LEDs as light emitters, and are installed so that the light irradiation direction is the main control device 70. The irradiation range IR of the light from the lighting devices 88a and 88b includes a range facing the MPU 72 in the facing wall portion 82 of the main controller 70. Thus, the visibility of the MPU 72 can be improved. In addition, the irradiation range IR includes a range that faces the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 on the facing wall portion 82 of the main control device 70. Thereby, the visibility of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 can be improved. Further, the irradiation range IR includes a range in which the coupling portion 83 is provided in the substrate box 81 of the main control device 70 and a range in which the seal 84 is provided. This makes it possible to improve the visibility of the connecting portion 83 and the sealing seal 84.

  Irradiation of light from the lighting devices 88a and 88b is performed in accordance with the opening angle of the front door 12 with respect to the housing 11, as will be described later in detail. To detect the opening angle of the front door 12, an opening angle sensor 89 is provided on the rear surface of the front door 12 and adjacent to the shaft portion 12a, as shown in FIG. It is possible to detect whether or not the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11 by the opening angle sensor 89, and when the front door 12 is open, the opening angle is a predetermined opening angle. Can be detected. The method of detecting the opening angle of the front door 12 by the opening angle sensor 89 is arbitrary. For example, when the front door 12 is in a closed state, it is pressed and the front door 12 is in an open state. A detecting unit that releases the pressed state, and a detecting unit that becomes a pressed state when the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined opening angle and does not become a pressed state until the opening angle of the front door 12 becomes the predetermined opening angle. Are individually conceivable.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The effect control device 90 is arranged on the front door 12 behind the image display device 63. The effect control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 based on the command received from the main control device 70. The effect control device 90 has a control board accommodated in a board box, similarly to the main control device 70.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main control device 70 as described above. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, and a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A certain RAM 74, a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 72, and each may be configured individually as a chip.

  The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31, the start detection sensor 41a for detecting the operation of the start lever 41, the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a for individually detecting the operation of the respective stop buttons 42, 43, 44, the medal insertion An inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting a medal inserted from the mouth 45, a credit inserted detection sensor 47a, 48a, 49a for individually detecting an operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, 49, and an operation of a settlement button 51. Settlement detection sensor 51a, payout detection sensor of hopper device 53, reset detection sensor for detecting operation of reset button 56 provided on power supply device 54, and setting key for detecting that a setting key has been inserted into setting key insertion hole 57. Various sensors such as a detection sensor and an open angle sensor 89 are connected. And, these signals from the sensors are input to the MPU 72.

  On the output side of the MPU 72, the reel unit 31, the selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the dual use display unit 66, the advantageous section display unit 67, the first to third notification display units 85 To 87, lighting devices 88a and 88b, effect control device 90, and the like. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotational drive of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31. The selector 52 detects the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if the reception is permitted, and then guides the medal to the hopper device 53 if the reception is prohibited. And has the function of discharging the medal to the medal tray 59 without detection. The selector driving section 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception inhibition state. Specifically, the selector driving section 52a moves the passage switching piece provided in the selector 52 to the position for the reception permission. And the position for the reception prohibition. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception inhibition state by switching between the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

  In addition, the MPU 72 executes the drive control of the hopper device 53 when paying out medals after the winning of the small winning combination. In addition, the MPU 72 controls the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 so as to display the number of game media to which the game medium has been added when the addition of the game medium occurs. In addition, the MPU 72 controls the display of the advantageous section display unit 67 so as to notify the user that the area is an advantageous section when the area is an advantageous section. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the notification display devices 85 to 87 so that a display corresponding to the management result of the game is performed. Further, the MPU 72 controls the light emission of the lighting devices 88a and 88b based on the detection result of the open angle sensor 89. In addition, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and transmits a command for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 to the effect control device 90. In this case, the display control of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is performed so that a display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the effect control device 90, whereas direct display control of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. In other words, for the image display device 63 that is the target of the relatively complicated display control, direct display control is performed in the effect control device 90, and the dual-purpose display unit 66 that is the target of the relatively simple display control is performed. Is directly controlled by the MPU 72. This makes it possible to perform both the display emphasizing the improvement of the degree of attention to the effect and the display emphasizing the reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72.

  A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply device 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply unit 54 includes a power supply unit that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit. The power failure monitoring circuit applies an external power supply to the power supply unit. The MPU 72 monitors the monitored voltage and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes the process at the time of a power failure by receiving the power failure signal, and enables a return to the processing state before the power failure after the power recovery. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power supply unit during power cut-off for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power during power cut-off when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off. As a result, even when the supply of the operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, the data is stored and held in the RAM 74 in a situation where the backup power can be supplied by the power supply unit during the power interruption (for example, one or two days). Is done. However, when the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on while the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 is pressed, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized.

  The effect control device 90 includes an effect control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various effects. An MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A certain RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input / output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are built in.

  It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be configured as an individual chip. Further, the backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 from the power supply unit during the power interruption of the power supply device 54 in a state where the supply of the operation power from the external power supply is cut off, but the backup power is supplied to the RAM 94. Is also good.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The MPU 92 of the main controller 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 as described above, and receives various commands from the MPU 72. An upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display control of the image display device 63 based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, so that various notifications and various effects can be performed. To be done.

  Although not shown, the effect control board 91 includes a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays the image data on the image display device 63. The character ROM has a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the image display device 63. The character ROM holds bitmap image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table which is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MDP 92 outputs a drawing list indicating the content of the image corresponding to each update timing to the VDP according to the determined execution content of the effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM in accordance with the drawing list, and creates display data in the video RAM using the read image data. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, the ROM 73, and the RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as a main MPU 72, a main ROM 73, and a main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93, and the RAM 94 of the production control device 90 are respectively provided. They are called MPU 92, production side ROM 93 and production side RAM 94.

  Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the main process, first, an initialization process is executed (step S101). In the initialization process, an interrupt by the timer interrupt process is permitted, and various initial settings are made to the registers in the main MPU 72 and the I / O device. After the completion of the initialization process, a display start process is executed (step S102). In the display start process, the display on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is started. In this case, when the information of the management result of the game history immediately before the last power interruption is stored in the main RAM 74, the first to third notification display devices 85 to 85 are displayed so that the display corresponding to the information is performed. The display control of 87 is executed. On the other hand, when the information of the management result of the game history immediately before the last power interruption is not stored in the main-side RAM 74 or when the regular information is not stored as the information, a predetermined initial display (for example, all lighting) is performed. ) Is performed so as to perform the display control of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87. The processing for managing the game history and the display contents on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 will be described later in detail.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the power is turned on (step S103). If the power is turned on with the setting key inserted (step S103: YES), if the reset button 56 has not been turned ON when the power is turned on (step S104: NO), the winning probability remains unchanged. The setting process is executed (Step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is turned on when the power is turned on (step S104: YES), the clearing process (step S105) is executed, and then the winning probability setting process is executed (step S106).

  In the clearing process, all areas in the main RAM 74 are initialized. In this case, an area for storing the set value of the slot machine 10 in the main RAM 74, an area for storing data indicating whether or not the player is in the BB state ST2, and data indicating the total number of game media provided in the BB state ST2 are stored. Area, an area storing data indicating a game state, an area storing data for specifying an end condition of the RT state ST6, an area storing data indicating a game section, and a management result of a game history. Each area of the main RAM 74 including the area where the data is stored is cleared to "0". As a result, when the clearing process is executed, the normal state ST1 is a normal section regardless of the state before the power shutdown, and the progress of the game is triggered by the occurrence of the abnormality in the state before the power shutdown. If the state is a regulated state, the abnormal state is released.

  In the winning probability setting process, the current setting value is read on the condition that the setting key is inserted and the ON operation is performed, and the current setting value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. When the clearing process of the main RAM 74 (step S105) is executed, a display corresponding to “setting 1” is displayed on the credit display unit 65 at the start of the winning probability setting process, and the clearing process (step S105) Is not executed, a display corresponding to the set value in the state before the power is turned off is displayed. In the winning probability setting process, the set value is updated by one each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display unit 65. When the reset button 56 is operated in a situation where the setting value is “Setting 6”, the setting value is updated to “Setting 1”. When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the winning probability setting process ends. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display section 65 is terminated.

  After executing the winning probability setting process, an advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S107). In the advantageous section initialization processing, processing for initializing information on the advantageous section is executed. As a result, when the winning probability setting process is executed, the game section surely becomes the normal section. The specific contents of the advantageous section initialization processing will be described later. After performing the advantageous section initialization processing, the process proceeds to the normal processing (step S108). The normal processing will be described later in detail.

  When the ON operation of the setting key is not performed in the main processing (step S103: NO), the power recovery processing from step S109 is executed. The power restoration process is a process for returning the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was turned off. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether the set value of the slot machine 10 is normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S109). Specifically, when the setting value is any one of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, it is determined to be normal, and when it is “0” or “7” or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is checked whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag (step S110). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and when the supply of the operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed, the power failure flag is set to “1”. Is set. If “1” is set in the power failure flag, it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S111). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to determine whether the value is normal.

  If an affirmative determination is made in all of steps S109 to S111, it means that the power failure process at the time of the previous power failure has been normally executed. In this case, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is returned to the register of the main MPU 72, whereby the register of the main MPU 72 The state is returned to the state before the power was cut off (step S112). Further, the power failure flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S113). Then, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing the execution of the power recovery process to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S114), the process returns to the address before the power shutdown (step S115).

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in any of steps S109 to S111, an operation prohibition process is performed. In the operation prohibition process, the next execution of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S116), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0", thereby clearing all the actuators connected to the output ports. Is turned off (step S117), and an error notification process for notifying the hole manager or the like of the occurrence of an error is executed (step S118). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition processing is released by executing the clear processing (step S105).

  Next, the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started, for example, every 1.49 msec.

  In the register save processing (step S201), the values of all registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal processing described later are saved in the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether or not "1" is set in the power failure flag. If "1" is set in the power failure flag, the process proceeds to step S203, and the process at the time of power failure is executed.

  The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72. In the process at the time of a power failure, it is first determined whether or not the transmission of the command has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the present process is terminated, the process returns to the timer interrupt process, and the transmission of the command is terminated. If the transmission of the command has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is stored in the main RAM 74. Thereafter, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal at the time of the blackout is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent RAM access is prohibited. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

  If “1” is not set in the power failure flag in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, a clearing process of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process for enabling the next timer interrupt to be set for the main MPU 72 itself is performed. In step S206, in order to rotate each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor provided on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. In step S207, the state of various sensors connected to the input port is read, and a sensor monitoring process for monitoring whether the read result is normal is performed.

  In step S208, a timer calculation process for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S209, a counter process for outputting the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the outside is performed. In step S210, a command output process of transmitting various commands to the production side MPU 92 is performed. In step S211, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port is performed. In step S212, the value of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 is returned to the corresponding register in the main MPU 72. In step S213, a management process for managing the game history and displaying contents corresponding to the management result on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is executed. In step S214, a lighting process for controlling light emission of the lighting devices 88a and 88b according to the opening angle of the front door 12 is executed. Thereafter, in step S215, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and the series of timer interrupt processes is completed. The details of the management process in step S213 and the illumination process in step S214 will be described later.

  Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed (step S301). After that, a start waiting process is executed (step S302). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has occurred in the previous game. If any of the replay winnings has occurred, a replay process for setting the same number of bets as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process ends. If no replay winning has occurred, it is determined whether the settlement button 51 has been operated. If the settlement button 51 has been operated, the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals are paid out. A medal return process is performed. After the medal return processing is completed or when the settlement button 51 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 are operated between the previous start waiting processing and the current start waiting processing. Then, if any of them is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the bet number or the like is performed, and the start waiting process ends. If neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the present start wait process, the start wait process ends.

  After the start waiting process in step S302, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bet has reached a specified number ("3" in this embodiment) (step S303). Returns to the start waiting process (step S302). If the bet number has reached the specified number, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S302). On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the main line ML is validated, and then the reception prohibition process is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged to the medal tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a. After that, a lottery process of a lottery for performing a lottery of a role in the current game is executed (step S306), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are driven and controlled in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the current role. Is executed (step S307).

  Thereafter, a medium providing process is executed (step S308). In the medium awarding process, when a small winning combination is established in the current game, a process for providing a number of game media corresponding to the small winning award to the player is executed. Specifically, when giving a virtual medal, a value corresponding to the current small win is added to a credit counter provided in the main RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit stored number, Drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that medals exceeding the upper limit storage number are paid out to the medal tray 59. In addition, in the medium providing process, the display control of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is performed so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be provided this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the dual-purpose display section 66 is continued until a new bet on game media is made.

  Thereafter, a corresponding process at the end of the game for enabling the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game is executed (step S309). Further, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the gaming hall is executed (step S310). Then, a reception permission process is executed (step S311). By executing the reception permission process, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

  The lottery process of the hand executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, a random number to be used when making a determination of a winning combination is acquired (step S401). In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and the main MPU 72 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the main RAM 74 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid a problem such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

  After the random number is obtained, a lottery table for determining the winning or losing of the combination is read from the later-described specific control data in the main ROM 73 (step S402). Here, in the present slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 to be turned on and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set which of the winning probabilities the lottery process of the winning combination is executed. “Setting n + 1” is more advantageous for the player than “Setting n”. Specifically, since “setting n + 1” has a higher winning probability of the role that triggers the transition to the BB state ST2 than “setting n”, “setting n + 1” is more gaming than “setting n” It is advantageous for the person. Further, even if the setting value is the same, the lottery table to be referred to differs depending on the game state. In step S402, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value and the current gaming state is selected.

  The lottery table corresponding to each of the normal state ST1 and the BB state ST2 (the first BB state or the second BB state) will be described with an example of “setting 3”. First, the lottery table selected in the normal state ST1 will be described. FIG. 14A is an explanatory diagram illustrating a lottery table for a normal state.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, index values IV are set in the lottery table for the normal state, and in each index value IV, winning data is set and a point value PV is set. I have. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value (“65535”) of the free-run counter.

  Specifically, bell winning data is set for the index value IV = 1. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 1, the bell winning is reliably established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. I do.

  In this slot machine 10, reel control is performed for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so that the reels can be slid up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. In other words, reel control is performed for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to stop the reels until the specified time (190 msec) elapses after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such a reel control, it is possible to easily establish a winning corresponding to the winning combination, and to prevent a winning corresponding to the winning combination from being established. It becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, a combination of symbols for establishing a winning is formed on one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If five or more symbols exist between the constituent symbols, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML depending on the operation timings of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44 (the event may be called “missing”). Say). The bell prize is a prize mode in which no miss occurs. Also, in the normal replay winning, the first promotion replay winning, and the second promotion replay winning, even if the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is any timing, it is missed. This is a winning mode. On the other hand, the watermelon winning, the cherry winning, the first BB winning, the second BB winning, and the SB winning are types of winning that may be missed depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  Watermelon winning data is set for the index value IV = 2. If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 2, a watermelon prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, a watermelon winning may not be established.

  Cherry winning data is set in the index value IV = 3. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 3, a cherry winning can be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotation position of the left reel 32L, a cherry winning may not be established.

  The first BB winning data is set for the index value IV = 4. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 4, the first BB prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the first BB prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. The second BB winning data is set for the index value IV = 5. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 5, the second BB prize can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the second BB prize may not be established depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. SB winning data is set for the index value IV = 6. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 6, the SB winning can be achieved regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the SB winning may not be established.

  Here, the winning data other than the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data, such as the watermelon winning data and the SB winning data, are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the winning is achieved, and the winning data is determined. It will not be carried over to the game after the game that became it. On the other hand, the first BB winning data and the second BB winning data correspond to the BB corresponding to the next and subsequent games after the winning game, except when the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S105). It is stored and held until a winning is achieved. In this case, in a game in which the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first BB winning data, the second BB winning data, and the SB winning data is excluded from the lottery target. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BB winning data and the SB winning data from being newly stored even though the first BB winning data or the second BB winning data is already stored and held. It is possible to prevent SB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

  Normally, replay winning data is set for the index value IV = 7. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 7, the normal replay winning is ensured regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational position of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. To establish.

  When the lottery table for the normal state is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 1 is about 1/7, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 2 is about 1/77. The probability of winning when the index value IV = 3 is approximately 1/423, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 4 and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 5 are as follows. Each is about 1/218, the probability of winning when the index value IV = 6 is 1/16, and the probability of winning when the index value IV = 7 is about 1 / 7.3.

  Next, the lottery table selected in the first BB state or in the “setting 3” and the second BB state will be described. FIG. 14B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for the BB state.

  In the lottery table for the BB state, as shown in FIG. 14B, the bell winning data is set for the index value IV = 1, similarly to the lottery table for the normal state. However, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 1 is “44000” which is a larger value than in the case of the lottery table for the normal state. In this case, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 1 is about 1 / 1.5. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 1, a bell prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, the number of game media provided when a bell prize is established is greater than the number of game media provided when another small role prize is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be provided per unit game in the BB state ST2 than in the normal state ST1.

  The winning data set for each of the index values IV = 2 and 3 and the point value PV set for each of the index values IV are the same as the index values IV = 2 and 3 in the lottery table for the normal state. I have. In addition, normal replay winning data is set in the index value IV = 4. The point value PV set to the index value IV = 4 is a value larger than the point value PV set to the index value IV = 7 where the normal replay winning data is set in the lottery table for the normal state. There is a certain "20530". In this case, the probability of winning at the index value IV = 4 is about 1 / 3.2. As a result, in the BB state ST2, a normal replay prize is established even if no small role is won. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of game media acquired by the player in the BB state ST2.

  Returning to the description of the lottery process (FIG. 13), after selecting the lottery table (step S402), the index value IV is set to “1” (step S403), and the determination value DV used when determining whether the combination is valid is set. (Step S404). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S401 is set as the current determination value DV, and a point value PV corresponding to “1”, which is the current index value IV, is added to this random number value. A new determination value DV is set.

  After that, it is determined whether the combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct (step S405). In the role determination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV has exceeded “65535”. If it exceeds “65535”, a winning data acquisition process for setting the winning combination data corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S406). In the winning data acquisition process, all the winning data set for the current index value IV in the reference lottery table is set in the main RAM 74. If the winning data is set, if the winning data is winning data other than the BB winning data, it is cleared to “0” after the end of the current game, regardless of whether or not a winning corresponding to the winning data is established, and BB If it is winning data, it is cleared to "0" when a winning is achieved.

  If the determination value DV does not exceed “65535” (step S405: NO), it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV has been lost. In this case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 (step S407), and it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a target to be determined (step S408). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the incremented index value IV has exceeded the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S404, and the determination as to whether or not the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S404, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV used for the previous winning / failing determination (that is, the current determination value DV) to obtain a new determination value DV. In step S405, a winning / non-winning determination is made based on the determination value DV.

  If the process of step S406 is executed or if a negative determination is made in step S408, it means that the determination of the winning or losing of the hand has been completed. In this case, after executing the stop information first setting processing for setting the stop information for reel stop control (step S409), the effect content determination processing is executed (step S410). In the effect content determination processing, a process for determining the content of the outline of the effect performed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in the current game is executed. As the contents of the large frame, the high expectation content, the medium expectation content, and the low expectation content are set so that the expectation of the occurrence of the BB state ST2 or the RT state ST6 gradually decreases. In the process of determining the effect contents, the contents of the outline of the effect are determined by lottery using a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current game state, the current game section, and the result of the lottery process of the winning combination.

  The information corresponding to the content of the outline determined in the process of determining the effect content is set in the game start command, and the game start command is set as a transmission target to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S411). The game start command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize that a new game has been started, and is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize the contents of the outline of the production determined by the main MPU 72. The command is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 in the command output process (step S210) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  When the production side MPU 92 receives the game start command, the production side MPU 92 grasps the contents of the outline of the production in this game from the game start command, and details the contents of the production in a mode corresponding to the grasped contents of the production outline. Determined by lottery. Then, a data table corresponding to the determined contents of the effect is read from the effect-side ROM 93 to the effect-side RAM 94, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed according to the read data table. Execute control.

  Thereafter, a notification control process is executed (step S412). In the notification control process, although details will be described later, the display control of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is performed so that when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, a display corresponding to the stop order to be notified is performed. At the same time, a process for causing the image display device 63 to execute the notification of the stop order to be notified is executed. After that, a transition trigger process of the RT state ST6 is executed (step S413). Although the details will be described later in the transition trigger process of the RT state ST6, a process for generating a trigger for transition to the RT state ST6 is executed.

  Next, the reel control process executed in step S307 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed (step S501). In the rotation start process, a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) elapses from the time when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 13) in the previous game is started. It is checked whether or not the wait time has elapsed, and if it has not elapsed, it waits until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and the rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing in step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. After that, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stand by until they rotate at a predetermined rotation speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. When the rotation speed of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes constant, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying lamps (not shown) of the stop buttons 42 to 44. This is notified to the player and the like.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S502). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been issued. Is determined (step S503). If the stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S502, and the process of step S502 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command has been issued, a stop command command is set (step S504). The stop command command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated and the stop command has been generated. When the stop command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S505 to S511 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

  In the stop control process, at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the symbol number of the reached symbol reaching the base position (specifically, the lower stage) is confirmed (step S505). Specifically, the symbol number of the symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output since the detection signal of the reel index sensor was input. Thereafter, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the slip number of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S506).

  In the slot machine 10, the stop mode for stopping each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to a stop mode in which when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the reaching symbol reaching the base position is directly stopped. Stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped after sliding for one symbol, stop mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding for two symbols, and stop mode in which the reels are stopped after sliding for three symbols. There are five types of stop modes including a stop mode of stopping after sliding. Therefore, in step S506, one of the values “0” to “4” is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

  After that, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the attained symbol, and the symbol number of the stopped symbol actually stopped at the base point position is determined (step S507). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol numbers of the symbols reached on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time are equal to the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols (step S508). If the symbol numbers are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are determined. A reel stop process for stopping the rotation of is performed (step S509). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S510). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed (step S511), and the process returns to step S502.

  Here, the stop information is information for setting the stop mode of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to correspond to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 13), and by using the stop information. It is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, “0” to “4”) with respect to the reached symbol that has reached the base point position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, slip number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the slip number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be employed in which the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. .

  As the processing for setting the stop information, the first stop information setting processing executed in step S409 of the lottery processing of winning combinations (FIG. 13) and the reel control processing (FIG. 15) are executed in step S511. The stop information second setting process exists. In the first stop information setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the stop information first setting process or the previous stop information second setting process is changed after the reel stops. In the stop information second setting processing, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the stop appearance of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, 32R. I do.

  If it is determined in step S510 that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, a winning determination process is executed in step S512. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML in each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. If the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is a symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination in the current lottery process, the winning combination is determined. A winning response process is executed as a winning is established. In the prize-winning process, if the prize is a small winning prize, the number of medals to be paid out is set in the main RAM 74 so that a game medium can be given in the medium giving process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process for executing the re-game setting process in the next start waiting process (step S302) is executed.

  After executing the winning determination processing, a winning result command is set as an output target to the production side MPU 92 (step S513). The winning result command includes data indicating whether the current winning has been established, and, if the winning has been established, includes data indicating the type of winning.

<About game state and game section>
Next, the game state and the game section will be described. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a gaming state existing in the slot machine 10.

  As described above as the gaming state, there are the normal state ST1, the BB state ST2, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6. The normal state ST1 is a gaming state in which the main RAM 74 stays by executing the clearing process (step S105). Further, in the first preparation state ST4, when the winning combination including the first promotion replay winning data is won in the lottery process of the combination, the first promotion replay winning is not established, and in the second preparation state ST5. If the second promotion replay winning is not established despite the winning of the role including the second promotion replay winning data in the lottery process of the role, the gaming state is the normal state ST1. The normal state ST1 is a gaming state having the lowest advantage compared to the other gaming states ST2 to ST6.

  The normal state ST1 is a game state in which a game for the normal upper limit number of games (specifically, 999 games) is performed unless a BB prize is established halfway. When the normal-side upper-limit-game number has been played in the normal state ST1, the process proceeds to the first preparation state ST4. Further, although details will be described later, in the normal state ST1, both the normal section and the advantageous section can be set as the game section. However, in the normal state ST1, the frequency of staying in the normal section is higher than in the advantageous section.

  The BB state ST2 is a gaming state to which a transition is made when a first BB prize or a second BB prize is established in any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6. is there. As described above, the BB state ST2 is a gaming state in which the expected number of game media to be provided per unit game is higher than the gaming states ST1 and ST3 to ST6 other than the BB state ST2. More specifically, a winning combination that enables the formation of a bell prize is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1 / 1.5) than in other gaming states, and when the winning combination is won, each reel 32L is used. , 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the bell prize is established. In the BB state ST2, if the small combination is not won, a normal replay winning is established. The BB state ST2 ends when the total number of game media provided since the start of the BB state ST2 is equal to or more than an end reference number (for example, “350”).

  The BB state ST2 includes a first BB state and a second BB state. The first BB state is a BB state ST2 to which a transition is made when a first BB prize is established, and the second BB state is a BB state ST2 to which a transition is made when a second BB prize is established. The BB state ST2 ends when the total number of game media provided since the start of the BB state ST2 is equal to or more than an end reference number (for example, “350”). In this case, since the end reference number is set to a number larger than the maximum number of game media that can be given in one game, the BB state ST2 continues over a plurality of games. The end reference number is the same in both the first BB state and the second BB state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first BB state and the second BB state may have different end reference numbers, but may have substantially the same end reference number. The first BB state and the second BB state may have substantially different end reference numbers. It may be configured. Further, the first BB state may be configured to have a larger number of reference ends than the second BB state, and the second BB state may be configured to have a larger number of reference ends than the first BB state.

  Although the expected number of game media provided in the BB state ST2 is the same between the first BB state and the second BB state, the setting mode of the game section is different from each other. Specifically, in the first BB state, as long as the number of continued games in the advantageous section does not reach the upper limit game number in the middle, the advantageous section is maintained in the advantageous section regardless of the game section before the start of the first BB state. It is maintained in the advantageous section even after the end of the 1BB state. For example, when the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the gaming section is set as an advantageous section in the first game of the first BB state, and the advantageous section is maintained in the entire first BB state, and further the first BB state is maintained. The advantageous section is maintained after the end. Further, when the first BB prize is established in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is maintained in the first BB state, and the advantageous section is maintained even after the first BB state ends.

  On the other hand, in the second BB state, unless the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number in the middle, the game section before the start of the second BB state is taken over as it is, and the game section remains as it is after the end of the second BB state. Is taken over. For example, when the second BB prize is established in the normal section, the normal section is maintained in the entire second BB state, and the normal section is maintained even after the second BB state ends. Further, when the second BB prize is established in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is maintained in the entire second BB state, and the second BB state is ended unless the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number on the way. Later, the advantageous section is maintained.

  As will be described in detail later, in the first BB state where the transition is made in the normal section, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first game. If the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed based on the result of the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 13) in the game after the first game in the first BB state. Is done. When the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, whether the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is promoted based on the result of the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 13) in the game after the first game in the first BB state. A lottery process for determining whether or not to perform the determination is performed. On the other hand, in the second BB state, the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 and the promotion lottery for the continuation rate of the RT state ST6, regardless of whether or not the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied before the start of the second BB state. None of the processing is performed.

  The probability that the first BB winning data is set in the lottery process of the combination is the same regardless of the setting value of the slot machine 10 from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, whereas the second BB winning data The probability that is set in the lottery process of the winning combination differs depending on the set value of the slot machine 10. In this case, as described above, in the first BB state, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 and the promotion lottery process for increasing the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 are executed, while in the second BB state, the transition lottery process and the promotion are performed. By preventing the lottery process from being executed, the transition probability to the RT state ST6 triggered by the occurrence of the BB state ST2 and the stay probability of the RT state ST6 are common between the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. It becomes possible.

  When the BB state ST2 ends, whether the ended BB state ST2 is the first BB state or the second BB state, or whether the game section is the normal section or the advantageous section, the post-bonus state ST3 Become. In addition, when the SB winning is achieved in any of the first preparation state ST4 and the second preparation state ST5, the state becomes the post-bonus state ST3.

  The post-bonus state ST3 is a gaming state in which the probability of a replay winning being established is higher than in the normal state ST1. More specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 17A and 17B, in both the normal state ST1 and the post-bonus state ST3, the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 7 in the lottery table. Is set, the point value PV assigned to the index value IV = 7 is “8978” in the normal state ST1 as shown in FIG. 17A, whereas the point value PV assigned to the index value IV = 7 is in the post-bonus state ST3. Is “9500” as shown in FIG. The types of the winning data set to the index values IV = 1 to 6 and the point values PV assigned to each of the index values IV = 1 to 6 are the same in the normal state ST1 and the post-bonus state ST3. Has become. As a result, the post-bonus state ST3 becomes a gaming state that is slightly more advantageous than the normal state ST1 with respect to the lottery process of the winning combination. In the post-bonus state ST3, both the normal section and the advantageous section can be set as the game section.

  In the post-bonus state ST3, in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), when the SB winning data is set to the index value IV = 6 and the SB prize is not established in the game, the game section is the normal section. And in any of the advantageous sections, the first preparation state ST4 is set. On the other hand, when the index value IV = 6 is won in the post-bonus state ST3 and the SB prize is established in the game, the transition to the first preparation state ST4 does not occur, and the stay in the post-bonus state ST3 is performed. It will be.

  The first preparation state ST4 is a gaming state in which the probability of a replay winning being established is the same as the post-bonus state ST3. More specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 17B and 17C, in both the post-bonus state ST3 and the first preparation state ST4, the normal replay is performed with the index value IV = 7 in the lottery table. Winning data is set. Also, index values IV = 8 to 13 are set in the lottery table in the first preparation state ST4, and each of the index values IV = 8 to 13 has both normal replay winning data and first promotion replay winning data. Is set. The point value PV assigned to the index value IV = 7 in the post-bonus state ST3 is “9500” as shown in FIG. 17B, while the index value IV = 7 in the first preparation state ST4. The total value of the point values PV set to 7 to 13 is “9500” as shown in FIG. The types of the winning data set to the index values IV = 1 to 6 and the point values PV assigned to each of the index values IV = 1 to 6 are determined in the post-bonus state ST3 and the first preparation state ST4. It is the same. Thus, in the first preparation state ST4, the advantage regarding the lottery process of the winning combination is the same as the post-bonus state ST3.

  FIG. 18A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the winning mode that is established when the winning is achieved with the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4. It is. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 18A, the first stop (the reels 32L, 32M, 32R where the first stop command is issued) is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the second reel. When the stop (second reel 32L, 32M, 32R in which the stop command is issued) is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop (reel 32L, 32M, 32R in which the last stop command is issued) is the right reel 32R. The first promotion replay winning is reliably established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and otherwise, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, as shown in FIG. 18 (a), when the index values IV = 9 to 13, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at which the first promotion replay winning is established is within the range of the stop order of six kinds. It differs from the value IV = 8 and from each other. As a result, even if a win is made with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery process of the combination in the first preparation state ST4 (FIG. 13), the stop order corresponding to the establishment of the first promotion replay winning is obtained. Unless the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the first promotion replay winning is not established. In the first preparation state ST4, both the normal section and the advantageous section can be set as the game section.

  The order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the first promotion replay winning is a lottery in the first preparation state ST4 in a situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in an advantageous section. When the winning is achieved at any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the table, the image is displayed on each of the image display device 63 and the dual-purpose display unit 66. This notification is performed after the game in which the notification is executed is started and until the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R ends and the constant speed period is reached, and the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled. Will be started.

  If the first promotion replay winning is not established in a case where the lottery table in the first preparation state ST4 wins at any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. Regardless of whether or not the game is performed, and regardless of the game section, the process proceeds to the normal state ST1. In this case, since the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed, the game section in the transition destination normal state ST1 becomes the normal section and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied regardless of the current game section. If so, it is invalidated and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. When the first promotion replay prize winning is established in a case where the lottery table in the first preparation state ST4 wins at any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13, whether the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. Regardless of whether it is or not, and irrespective of the game section, the process proceeds to the second preparation state ST5.

  The second preparation state ST5 is a gaming state in which the probability of a replay winning being established is higher than in the first preparation state ST4. Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 17C, in the lottery table in the first preparation state ST4, the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 7 and the index values IV = 8 to 13 are set. While both the normal replay winning data and the first promotion replay winning data are set, the index value IV = 7 in the lottery table in the second preparation state ST5 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 17D. The normal replay winning data is set, and both the normal replay winning data and the second promotion replay winning data are set at index values IV = 8 to 13. The total value of the point values PV set to the index values IV = 7 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4 is “9500” as shown in FIG. In ST5, the total value of the point values PV set to the index values IV = 7 to 13 is “43500” as shown in FIG. The types of the winning data set to the index values IV = 1 to 6 and the point values PV assigned to each of the index values IV = 1 to 6 are determined in the first preparation state ST4 and the second preparation state ST5. Are the same. As a result, the second preparation state ST5 becomes a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first preparation state ST4 with respect to the lottery process of winning combinations.

  FIG. 18B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the established winning mode when the winning is achieved with the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5. It is. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 18B, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. In some cases, the second promotion replay winning is reliably established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and otherwise, the normal replay winning is established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. . Also, with the index values IV = 9 to 13, as shown in FIG. 18B, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which the second promotion replay winning is established is within the range of six stop orders. It is different from the index value IV = 8 and different from each other. As a result, even in the case of winning in any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery process of the combination in the second preparation state ST5 (FIG. 13), the stop order corresponding to the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is achieved. Unless the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the second promotion replay winning is not established. In the second preparation state ST5, both the normal section and the advantageous section can be set as the game section.

  The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is a lottery in the second preparation state ST5 in the advantageous section where the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. When the winning is achieved at any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the table, the image is displayed on each of the image display device 63 and the dual-purpose display unit 66. This notification is performed after the game in which the notification is executed is started and until the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R ends and the constant speed period is reached, and the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled. Will be started.

  If the second promotion replay winning is not established in the case where the lottery table in the second preparation state ST5 has been won with any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. Regardless of whether or not the game section is in the game section, the process proceeds to the normal state ST1. In this case, since the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed, the game section in the transition destination normal state ST1 becomes the normal section and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied regardless of the current game section. If so, it is invalidated and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. If the second promotion replay winning is established in the case where the lottery table in the second preparation state ST5 wins at any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13, whether the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. Regardless of whether or not, and regardless of the game section, the process proceeds to the RT state ST6.

  The RT state ST6 is a gaming state in which the probability of a replay winning is higher than in the second preparation state ST5. Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 17D, in the lottery table in the second preparation state ST5, the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 7, and the index values IV = 8 to 13 are set. While both the normal replay winning data and the second promotion replay winning data are set, as shown in the explanatory view of FIG. Winning data is set. Then, in the second preparation state ST5, the total value of the point values PV set to the index values IV = 7 to 13 is “43500” as shown in FIG. The point value PV set to the index value IV = 7 is “48500” as shown in FIG. The types of the winning data set to the index values IV = 1 to 6 and the point values PV assigned to each of the index values IV = 1 to 6 are the same in the second preparation state ST5 and the RT state ST6. It has become. Thereby, the RT state ST6 is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the second preparation state ST5 with respect to the lottery process of the winning combination.

  The RT state ST6 is a game state in which the game is continued until a game corresponding to the upper limit number of games on the RT side (specifically, 30 games) is performed unless a BB prize is established on the way. Although details will be described later, in the RT state ST6, both the normal section and the advantageous section can be set as the game section. However, in the RT state ST6, the frequency of staying in the advantageous section is higher than that in the normal section.

  When the games corresponding to the RT side upper limit game number are played in the RT state ST6, the process shifts to the first preparation state ST4. When the RT state ST6 ends, the continuous lottery process is executed according to the continuation rate set at that time. If the continuous lottery process results in a continuous winning, the process shifts to the first preparation state ST4 in the advantageous section where the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. In this situation, when the game shifts to the first preparation state ST4, if the winning is achieved with any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table in the first preparation state ST4, the first promotion replay winning can be established. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the stop order and the first promotion replay winning is achieved, the second preparation state ST5 is entered. The second preparation state ST5 is also an advantageous section, and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. Therefore, when the winning is achieved at any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery table in the second preparation state ST5, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is determined. Be informed. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the stop order and the second promotion replay winning is achieved, the RT state ST6 is entered. In other words, even if the RT state ST6 ends, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the stop order notified by the continuous winning in the continuous lottery process executed at the end of the RT state ST6, thereby returning to the RT state ST6. It will return.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the continuous lottery process that the game has failed, the game shifts to the first preparation state ST4 in a state where the shift condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. In this case, unless the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is newly satisfied, the first promotion replay prize is established even if the lottery table in the first preparation state ST4 wins at any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the operation is not notified. Then, if the first promotion replay prize cannot be established in spite of being won with any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13, the advantageous section initialization processing is executed as described above. Then, the state is shifted to the normal state ST1 and the normal section.

  Here, as described above, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the first promotion replay winning in the first preparation state ST4 and the establishment of the second promotion replay winning in the second preparation state ST5 are possible. The notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed when the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section and the game is performed even when the notification is not performed. When the actual stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is the stop order corresponding to the correct answer, the first promotion replay winning is established in the first preparation state ST4, and the first promotion replay winning is achieved in the second preparation state ST5. 2 Promotion Replay winning is established. Then, even if it is a normal section or the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, if the second promotion replay winning is established, the processing shifts to the RT state ST6. Even in the RT state ST6 shifted under such a situation, it is treated as the same as the RT state ST6 shifted in a situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied and is an advantageous section. Further, in the case of transition to the RT state ST6 in such a situation, the game section becomes an advantageous section in the RT state ST6, and the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is determined at the time of the transition.

  In the first preparation state ST4, when the condition for shifting to the normal section or the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, if one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won, it is possible to establish the first promotion replay winning. Although the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be performed is not notified, an effect that allows the player to recognize that the winning combination has been won is executed on the image display device 63. In the second preparation state ST5, when the condition for shifting to the normal section or the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, if any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won, the second promotion replay winning is established. Although the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are allowed to be stopped is not notified, an effect in which the player can recognize that the player has won the role is executed on the image display device 63. The player who has confirmed the effect performs the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R while expecting the stop order corresponding to the correct answer. Then, when the transition to the RT state ST6 finally occurs, the feeling that the transition to the RT state ST6 has been gained on its own is strengthened, and a sense of satisfaction is obtained. Further, even in the RT state ST6, the section becomes an advantageous section and the continuation rate is determined at the time of the transition, so that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified in the same manner as the RT state ST6 that has transitioned along the notified route. , A loop in the RT state ST6 can be expected. From this point, it is possible to obtain a feeling of satisfaction in obtaining the transition to the RT state ST6 by itself.

  Next, how the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in relation to the game section will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 19A shows a period in which the game section is a normal section, FIG. 19B shows a period in which the game section is an advantageous section, and FIG. 13) shows the timing at which the SB winning data is set, FIG. 19 (d) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the normal state ST1, and FIG. 19 (e) shows the gaming state in the post-bonus state ST3. 19 (f) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the first preparation state ST4, FIG. 19 (g) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the second preparation state ST5, FIG. 19H shows a period in which the gaming state is in the RT state ST6.

  First, a case where a shift to the advantageous section occurs in the normal state ST1 will be described.

  An index in which the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 19C at the timing of t1 which is a normal section as shown in FIG. 19A and is the normal state ST1 as shown in FIG. The value IV = 6 is won by the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). When the SB winning data is set in the normal section, the game shifts to the advantageous section in the next game after the game, regardless of whether the SB winning is achieved in the game. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b).

  When the transition to the advantageous section is triggered by the setting of the SB winning data, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the game shifted to the advantageous section. However, in the shift lottery process executed in response to the shift to the advantageous section in the normal state ST1, the result is basically a deviation. Then, if the result of the shift lottery process is off, the advantageous section ends in the game in which the shift lottery process has been executed. Therefore, at the timing of t3 without transition to the RT state ST6, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section at the timing of t3, as shown in FIGS.

  Next, a case will be described in which the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 to shift to an advantageous section.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 19C at the timing of t4 which is the normal section and the post-bonus state ST3 as shown in FIG. The lottery is won for the index value IV = 6 in the lottery process (FIG. 13). As described above, when the SB winning data is set in the normal section, the game shifts to the advantageous section in the next game with respect to the game regardless of whether or not the SB winning is achieved in the game. When the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3, and when the SB winning is not achieved in the game, the gaming state shifts from the next game to the first preparation state ST4. This time, since the SB winning was not achieved in the game in which the SB winning data was set, as shown in FIGS. 19 (a), 19 (b), 19 (e) and 19 (f), At a timing t5 when the next game is started with respect to the game in which the winning data is set, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the game state changes from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state. Move to ST4.

  When the transition to the advantageous section is triggered by the setting of the SB winning data, as described above, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the game that has transitioned to the advantageous section. In this case, since the transfer lottery process is executed in the first preparation state ST4, the transfer win is basically performed. When the transfer lottery process results in a transfer winning, the transition to the normal state ST1 or the RT state ST6 basically occurs when the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. Until at least continue. In this case, if any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won in the first preparation state ST4, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the first promotion replay winning is notified. By stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in accordance with the notified stop order, the game state changes from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST4 at the timing of t6 as shown in FIGS. 19 (f) and 19 (g). Move to the preparation state ST5. Further, in the second preparation state ST5, when any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is notified. By stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in accordance with the notified stop order, the game state changes from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state at the timing of t7 as shown in FIGS. 19 (g) and 19 (h). The process proceeds to ST6.

  The RT state ST6 continues for 30 games, and the 30th game is consumed at the timing of t8, so that the gaming state is changed from the RT state ST6 to the third state as shown in FIGS. 19 (h) and 19 (f). The process proceeds to 1 ready state ST4. Further, at the timing when the RT state ST6 ends, the continuous lottery process is executed according to the continuation rate set at that time. As a result of the continuous winning in the continuous lottery process, even if the state transitions from the RT state ST6 to the first preparation state ST4, the situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section is maintained. Therefore, after the first preparation state ST4 is performed over the timing t8 to t9 as shown in FIG. 19F, the second preparation state ST4 is performed over the timing t9 to t10 as shown in FIG. The state ST5 is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 19H, the RT state ST6 is performed over the timing of t10 to t11.

  After that, when the RT state ST6 ends at the timing of t11, the continuous lottery process executed causes a disconnection, so that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied though it is an advantageous section. In this case, as shown in FIG. 19 (f), in the first preparation state ST4 shifted at the timing of t11, even if the player wins with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13, it is possible to establish the first promotion replay winning. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped is not notified. Therefore, the first promotion replay prize cannot be achieved in the game that has been won with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13, and the timing shown in FIG. 19D and FIG. As shown, the gaming state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1. Further, by executing the initialization process of the advantageous section at the timing of t12, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIGS. 19 (a) and 19 (b). As a result, the state returns to the normal state ST1 which is a normal section.

  Next, the timing at which the shift lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed will be described in more detail. FIG. 20 is a time chart showing the manner in which the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. 20 (a) shows the execution period of one game, FIG. 20 (b) shows the timing at which the SB winning data is set in the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 13), and FIG. FIG. 20 (d) shows a period in which the game section is an advantageous section, and FIG. 20 (e) shows a timing in which a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. FIG. 20F shows an execution period of the first BB state.

  First, a description will be given of a case where the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is performed when the SB winning data is set in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13).

  As shown in FIG. 20 (c), a new game is started at the timing of t1, which is a normal section, as shown in FIG. 20 (a). Then, in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) executed at the start of the game, SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 20 (b). Thereby, at the timing of t2 when the game ends, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 20 (c) and FIG. 20 (d).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 20A, the next game is started at the timing of t3. Since this game is the first game after the game section has shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, the game shifts to the RT state ST6 at the timing t3 when the game starts, as shown in FIG. A lottery process is executed. The probability of winning in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 differs depending on the gaming state in which the transition lottery process is executed.

  The lottery mode of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6, which is executed in response to the setting of the SB winning data, will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (d). FIGS. 21A and 21B illustrate the first table for the normal state and the second table for the normal state, which are referred to when the lottery process is shifted to the RT state ST6 in the normal state ST1. FIG. 21C is referred to when the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is performed in any of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5. FIG. 21D is an explanatory diagram for describing tables for various states. FIG. 21D illustrates an RT state table referred to when a lottery process for transitioning to the RT state ST6 is performed in the RT state ST6. FIG.

  When the SB winning data is set in the normal state ST1 and the shift lottery process to the RT state ST6 is performed, one of the first table for the normal state and the second table for the normal state is referred to. In the first table for the normal state, as shown in FIG. 21A, the probability of a winning result in the transfer lottery process is 0%, and the probability of a departure result is 100%. In other words, when the transfer lottery process is executed with reference to the first table for the normal state, the result surely comes off. If the result of the shift lottery process is off, the advantageous section ends in one game, and returns from the state of the normal state ST1 and the advantageous section to the state of the normal state ST1 and the normal section. I do. This makes it possible to reduce the number of games to be consumed in the advantageous section when the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, and the number of games to be consumed in the advantageous section does not increase insignificantly. It is possible to do so.

  On the other hand, in the second table for the normal state, as shown in FIG. 21B, the probability of a winning result in the transfer lottery process is 100%, and the probability of a departure result is 0%. That is, when the transfer lottery process is executed with reference to the second table for the normal state, the winning result is reliably obtained. Of the six levels of continuation rates, the three continuation rates to be selected are the three levels on the high continuation rate side. Specifically, a continuation rate of 80% is selected with a 95% probability, and a continuation rate of 90% is selected. The rate is selected with a probability of 3% and the continuation rate of 100% is selected with a probability of 2%. Thereby, it is possible to increase the advantage of executing the transfer lottery process with reference to the second table for the normal state. In addition, the selected continuation rate is maintained until the advantageous section end condition is satisfied and the advantageous section initialization processing is executed. By the way, if the continuation rate of 100% is selected, the state in which the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained until the condition for terminating the advantageous section is satisfied even if the RT state ST6 is once ended. Becomes In the normal state ST1, when an advantageous section is set and a winning result is obtained in the transfer lottery process, a state in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained at least until the transfer to the first preparation state ST4. . Then, by performing a stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in accordance with the stop order notified in the first preparation state ST4, the first promotion replay winning is established, and the reels 32L according to the stop order notified in the second preparation state ST5. , 32M, and 32R, the second promotion replay winning is established, thereby shifting to the RT state ST6.

  As described above, the normal state ST1 continues until a game of the normal upper limit number of games (specifically, 999 games) is performed unless a transition to the BB state ST2 occurs. In this case, if the number of remaining games up to the normal side upper limit game number in the normal state ST1 is more than 50 games, the first table for the normal state is referred to in the transfer lottery process, and the normal side upper limit game in the normal state ST1. When the number of remaining games up to the number becomes 50 games or less, the second table for the normal state is referred to in the transfer lottery process. Thereby, it is possible to make the advantage of the transition to the RT state ST6 different according to the timing at which the SB winning data is set in the normal state ST1. In particular, when the remaining number of games up to the normal-side upper limit game number in the normal state ST1 is within a predetermined game number range included in 10% or less of the normal-side upper limit game number, the second table for the normal state is referred to. By doing so, it is possible to compensate for staying in the normal state ST1 for a long time without generating both the BB state ST2 and the RT state ST6. The situation in which the second table for the normal state is referred to is not limited to a situation in which the predetermined game number range is included in 10% or less of the normal upper limit game number, but is included in 20% or less. The predetermined game number range may be set, or the predetermined game number range included in 5% or less may be set.

  When the SB winning data is set in any of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5, and the process of shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed, a table for various states is referred to. As shown in FIG. 21C, the probability of a winning result in the transfer lottery process is 100%, and the probability of a missed result in the table for various states is 0%. That is, when the transfer lottery process is executed with reference to the tables for various states, the winning result is surely obtained. In addition, all of the continuation rates existing in six stages are to be selected, but the three-stage selectivity on the low continuation ratio side is higher than the three-stage selectivity on the high continuation ratio side. Specifically, a continuation rate of 50% is selected with a probability of 80%, a continuation rate of 60% is selected with a probability of 12%, a continuation rate of 70% is selected with a probability of 7%, and a continuation rate of 80% is selected. The continuation rate is selected with a probability of 0.5%, the continuation rate of 90% is selected with a probability of 0.4%, and the continuation rate of 100% is selected with a probability of 0.1%. In other words, the probability of a winning result in the transfer lottery process is 100% in the table for various states, like the second table for the normal state, but the expected value of the continuation rate to be selected is the same as that of the table for various states. Is lower than the second table for the normal state. By setting the selection mode of the continuation rate in this way, the situation where the table for various states is referred to is more advantageous than the situation where the first table for the normal state is referred to, and the situation where the first table for the normal state is referred to. It is more disadvantageous than the situation where two tables are referenced.

  In the post-bonus state ST3, when the SB winning data is set to the index value IV = 6 where the SB winning data has been won by the lottery process of the winning combination and the SB prize has been established, the post-bonus state ST3 does not occur without shifting to the first preparation state ST4. Will stay in. In this case, if the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 in a normal section, the next game after the SB winning game, that is, the game in the SB state, The game in the post-state ST3 is the first game after the transition to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed in the game with reference to the tables for various states. Further, in the first preparation state ST4 or the second preparation state ST5, when the SB winning data is set in the normal section and the SB winning is established, the next game after the SB winning is established. The game that is in the SB state, that is, the game in the post-bonus state ST3, is the first game after the transition to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed with reference to the various state tables in the game. Is done. In these transition lottery processes, the winning result is obtained as described above. Therefore, at least until the transition to the first preparation state ST4, the advantageous section is maintained and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. Then, by performing a stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in accordance with the stop order notified in the first preparation state ST4, the first promotion replay winning is established, and the reels 32L according to the stop order notified in the second preparation state ST5. , 32M, and 32R, the second promotion replay winning is established, thereby shifting to the RT state ST6.

  In the post-bonus state ST3, if the SB winning data is set to the index value IV = 6 and the lottery process of the winning combination is won and the SB prize is not established, a transition to the first preparation state ST4 occurs. If the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 and in the normal section, the game following the game in which the SB winning data is set and in the first preparation state ST4. Is the first game after the transition to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed in the game with reference to the tables for various states. If the SB winning data is set in the first preparation state ST4 in the normal section, and the SB prize is not established, in the next game after the game in which the SB winning data is set. Then, the game in the first preparation state ST4 becomes the first game after the transition to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed in the game with reference to the tables for various states. In these transition lottery processes, the winning result is obtained as described above. Therefore, at least an advantageous section is obtained until the winning is achieved in the lottery process (FIG. 13) of the hand in any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4. Thus, the state in which the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained. Then, by performing a stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in accordance with the stop order notified in the first preparation state ST4, the first promotion replay winning is established, and the reels 32L according to the stop order notified in the second preparation state ST5. , 32M, and 32R, the second promotion replay winning is established, thereby shifting to the RT state ST6.

  If the SB winning data is set in the second preparation state ST5 in a normal section and the SB winning is not established, the game is a game next to the game in which the SB winning data is set. The game in the second preparation state ST5 is the first game after the transition to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed in the game with reference to the tables for various states. In these transfer lottery processes, the winning result is obtained as described above. Therefore, at least an advantageous section is obtained until the winning is achieved in the lottery process (FIG. 13) of any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5. Thus, the state in which the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained. Then, by performing a stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in accordance with the stop order notified in the second preparation state ST5, a second promotion replay winning is established, thereby shifting to the RT state ST6.

  When the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed, the lottery table for the RT state is referred to. In the lottery table for the RT state, as shown in FIG. 21D, the probability of a winning result in the shift lottery process is 100%, and the probability of a departure result is 0%. That is, when the transfer lottery process is executed with reference to the table for the RT state, the winning result is surely obtained. In addition, only the highest continuation rate of 100% can be selected from the continuation rates having six levels. This makes it possible to make the situation where the table for the RT state is referred to during the transfer lottery process more advantageous than the situation where another table is referred to during the transfer lottery process.

  The transition to the RT state ST6 is basically performed in the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is basically maintained also in the RT state ST6. However, if the number of games continued without shifting to the normal section in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), initialization processing of the advantageous section is performed regardless of the gaming state at that time. Is executed to shift to the normal section. Further, even if the upper limit number of games has not been reached, the number of trigger games in which the number of games continued without shifting to the normal section in the advantageous section is smaller than the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1450 games) In the situation described above, in other words, in the situation where the number of remaining games up to the upper limit game number is within the specific game number range included in 5% or less of the upper limit game number, a new transition to the RT state ST6 occurs. In this case, upon transition to the RT state ST6, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section, and in the RT state ST6, the game starts from the first game to the normal section. However, in the RT state ST6, the same lottery table is referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) in both the normal section and the advantageous section, and the lottery table includes the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is no role set for which the advantage differs depending on whether or not the stop order is notified. That is, the advantage of the RT state ST6 is the same in both the normal section and the advantageous section. When the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 in the normal section, regardless of whether the SB winning is achieved in the game, the next game after the game in which the SB winning data is set is set. The game in the RT state ST6 is the first game after the transition to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is executed in the game with reference to the table for the RT state. When the transfer lottery process is executed with reference to the RT state table, the winning result is reliably obtained as described above, and the continuation rate of 100% is reliably selected.

  With the above-described configuration, it is possible to create a situation in which the advantageous section continues beyond the upper limit number of games, with the RT state ST6 interposed therebetween, which is a normal section but has the same degree of advantage as the advantageous section. As a result, the player expects that the advantageous section substantially continues beyond the upper limit number of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In particular, when the transfer lottery process is executed with reference to the table for the RT state, the continuation rate of 100% is reliably selected. The section continues with a high probability up to the upper limit game number or the trigger game number. In other words, it is possible to generate a situation in which the advantageous section substantially continues with a high probability over twice the number of trigger games. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the SB winning data will be set in a situation where the advantageous section continues for the number of trigger games and is in the RT state ST6 and is a normal section.

  If the SB winning data is not set in the RT state ST6 and the normal section, the first preparation state ST4 to which the transition is made after the end of the RT state ST6 is also the normal section. Then, as described above, in the case of the first preparation state ST4 and the normal section, in the case of winning in one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the first promotion. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the replay winning is not notified, and if the first promotion replay winning is not established, the process shifts to the normal state ST1. As a result, the player strongly expects the SB winning data to be set in the RT state ST6 and in the normal section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  By the way, in the state of the RT state ST6, which is a normal section, an effect that enables the player to recognize the situation is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. This makes it possible to appropriately increase the player's expectation that the SB winning data will be set in this situation.

  Next, a case where the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed upon the transition to the first BB state in the normal section as a trigger will be described with reference to FIG. 20 again.

  As shown in FIG. 20C, a new game is started at the timing of t4, which is a normal section, as shown in FIG. Then, in this game, a first BB prize is established. As a result, at the timing of t5 when the game ends, the state shifts to the first BB state as shown in FIG. Further, when the transition to the first BB state occurs in the normal section, a process for shifting the game section from the normal section to the advantageous section is executed. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIGS. 20 (c) and 20 (d).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 20A, the next game is started at the timing of t6. Since this game is the first game after the gaming section has shifted from the normal section to the advantageous section, as shown in FIG. A lottery process is executed. In this transfer lottery process, the table for the first BB state is referred to.

  FIG. 21E is an explanatory diagram for describing a table for the first BB state. In the table for the first BB state, the probability of a winning result in the transfer lottery process is 5%, and the probability of a disconnection result is 95%. In addition, all of the continuation rates existing in six stages are to be selected, but the three-stage selectivity on the low continuation ratio side is higher than the three-stage selectivity on the high continuation ratio side. Specifically, when the winning result is obtained in the transfer lottery process, the continuation rate of 50% is selected with a probability of 2%, the continuation rate of 60% is selected with a probability of 1%, and the continuation rate of 70% is selected. The rate is selected with a probability of 1%, the continuation rate of 80% is selected with a probability of 0.5%, the continuation rate of 90% is selected with a probability of 0.4%, and the continuation rate of 100% is set to 0. Selected with 1% probability. Therefore, the situation in which the table for the first BB state is referred to is more advantageous than the situation in which the first table for the normal state is referred to. This is more disadvantageous than the situation where the table is referenced.

  The advantageous section is maintained in the first BB state regardless of whether or not a winning result is obtained in the transfer lottery process executed in the first game in the first BB state. Then, when the lottery opportunity is won in the first BB state, when the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, the process of shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed, and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. If so, the promotion process of the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is executed. That is, in the first BB state, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 may be satisfied not only at the start of the first BB state but also at an intermediate timing. Further, when the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is already satisfied in the first BB state, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 may increase at a timing in the middle of the first BB state. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the first BB state.

  Next, a specific processing configuration that enables the setting of the above-described gaming state will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a corresponding process executed by the main MPU 72 when the game is over. It should be noted that the response process at the end of the game is executed in step S309 in the normal process (FIG. 12). Since the processing of step S309 is executed after the reel control processing, the processing is executed when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in one game and the game ends.

  First, control processing for a game section is executed (step S601). In the control process of the game section, a process for shifting the game section between the normal section and the advantageous section is executed as will be described later in detail. After that, the process for BB is executed (step S602). In the BB processing, processing for shifting to the BB state ST2 and processing for advancing the BB state ST2 will be described in detail later.

  Thereafter, on condition that the BB state is not ST2 (step S603: NO), processing for jumping to processing corresponding to the value of the state counter provided in the main RAM 74 is executed (step S604). The state counter is a counter for specifying which of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6 by the main MPU 72. . When the value of the state counter is "0", the normal state process (step S605) for advancing the normal state ST1 is executed, and when the value of the state counter is "1", the post-bonus state ST3 is advanced. Post-bonus state processing (step S606) is performed, and when the value of the state counter is “2”, the first preparation state processing (step S607) for advancing the first preparation state ST4 is performed, and the state When the value of the counter is “3”, the second preparation state process (Step S608) for advancing the second preparation state ST5 is executed. When the value of the state counter is “4”, the RT state ST6 is changed. An RT state process (Step S609) for proceeding is performed. When the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S105), the value of the state counter becomes "0".

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the normal state processing (step S605). Note that, as described above, the processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, so the normal state processing is also executed when the game ends.

  First, the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S701). The ceiling game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to grasp the number of games continued without transition to the BB state ST2 in the normal state ST1. If the value of the ceiling game number counter obtained by adding 1 is the normal side upper limit game number (step S702: YES), the value of the state counter is added by 2 (step S703). Thereby, the value of the state counter becomes “2” corresponding to the execution of the first preparation state processing. That is, the gaming state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the first preparation state ST4. Further, the value of the ceiling game number counter is cleared to “0” (step S704).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing post-bonus state processing (step S606). Note that, as described above, the processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, so the post-bonus state processing is also executed when the game ends.

  If the SB winning data is set by winning the index value IV = 6 in the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 13) in the current game (step S801: YES), it is determined whether or not the SB winning has been achieved in the current game. Is determined (step S802). If the SB winning is established (step S802: NO), the value of the state counter is incremented by 1 (step S803). Thereby, the value of the state counter becomes “2” corresponding to the execution of the first preparation state processing. That is, the gaming state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4. On the other hand, if the SB prize has been established (step S802: YES), the post-bonus state process ends. As a result, even if the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3, if the SB prize is established, the player stays in the post-bonus state ST3. Further, with the above configuration, the post-bonus state ST3 is continued at least until SB winning data is set, unless a transition to the BB state ST2 occurs.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the first preparation state processing (step S607). Note that, as described above, the processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, so the first preparation state processing is also executed when the game ends.

  When the SB winning has been achieved in the current game (step S901: YES), the value of the state counter is set to “1” (step S902). Thereby, the gaming state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the post-bonus state ST3.

  In the case where the player has won any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the current game and the first promotion replay winning has been established (steps S903 and S904: YES), the value of the state counter is incremented by one. (Step S905). As a result, the value of the state counter becomes “3” corresponding to the execution of the second preparation state processing. That is, the gaming state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5. On the other hand, when the first promotion replay prize winning has not been achieved although the index value IV is any one of 8 to 13 in the current game (step S903: YES, step S904: NO), the state counter is cleared to “0”. (Step S906). Thereby, the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the second preparation state processing (step S608). Note that, as described above, the processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, so the second preparation state processing is also executed when the game ends.

  If the SB winning has been achieved in the current game (step S1001: YES), the value of the state counter is set to “1” (step S1002). Thereby, the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the post-bonus state ST3.

  In the case where the player has won any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the current game and the second promotion replay winning has been achieved (step S1003 and step S1004: YES), the value of the state counter is incremented by one. (Step S1005). Thus, the value of the state counter becomes “4” corresponding to the execution of the RT state processing. That is, the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6. Also, “30” is set to the RT game number counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1006). The RT game number counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to grasp the number of remaining continuous games in the RT state ST6.

  On the other hand, when the second promotion replay winning is not achieved although the player has won any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the current game (step S1003: YES, step S1004: NO), the state counter is cleared to “0”. (Step S1007). Thereby, the game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the normal state ST1.

  Here, a processing configuration for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the first preparation state ST4 and the second preparation state ST5 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the notification control processing. The notification control process is executed in step S412 in the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 13). Since the lottery process of the role is executed before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the start of the game, the notification control process is also performed before the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the start of the game. Be executed.

  In the first preparation state ST4, when the winning is achieved with any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 (step S1101: YES), the advantageous section flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to “1” and the main RAM 74 is set. It is determined whether or not the value of the advantageous end preparation flag provided in is “0” (step S1102). The advantageous section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is an advantageous section. When the advantageous section flag is set to “1”, the advantageous section is an advantageous section, and the value of the advantageous section flag is “0”. Is a normal section.

  The advantageous end preparation flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 72 that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section, and “1” is set in the advantageous end preparation flag. If it is, it means that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section. When the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "1", even if the first preparation state ST4 is selected and the index value IV is any of 8 to 13 in the advantageous section, the first promotion replay winning is achieved. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be established is not notified, and the reels are won with any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5 in the advantageous section. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay winning is not notified. On the other hand, if the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is “0”, if the first preparation state ST4 is selected, and if the section is an advantageous section and the winning is achieved with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13, the first promotion replay is performed. When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the winning to be established is notified, and the reels are won with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5 and the advantageous section. Is notified of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the second promotion replay winning.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, the first display data setting process is executed (step S1103). In the setting processing of the first display data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the first promotion replay winning based on the information of the winning combination of the current time among the index values IV = 8 to 13. The display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is controlled so that the display of the value corresponding to the above is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, a value corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the first promotion replay winning is displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. The display on the dual-purpose display section 66 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the current game. Further, the first stop order command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1104). In the first stop order command, information for enabling the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the first promotion replay winning in this game is set.

  In the second preparation state ST5, when the winning is achieved with any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 (step S1105: YES), “1” is set to the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 and the main RAM 74 is advantageously ended. It is determined whether the value of the preparation flag is “0” (step S1106). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, a process of setting the second display data is executed (step S1107). In the setting processing of the second display data, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the second promotion replay winning based on the information of the winning combination this time among the index values IV = 8 to 13. The display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is controlled so that the display of the value corresponding to the above is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. As a result, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, the value corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is displayed on the shared display section 66. The display on the dual-purpose display section 66 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the current game. In addition, the second stop order command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S1108). In the second stop order command, information for enabling the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay winning in the current game is set.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a notification process executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the notification process is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

  When the first stop order command or the second stop order command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1201: YES), the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the currently received stop order command is displayed on the image display device. The data required for display at 63 is set (step S1202). However, at this timing, the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is not displayed on the image display device 63. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in a measurement counter provided in the production side RAM 94 (step S1203). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than the acceleration period from when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate to the constant speed, and is set to, for example, 0.5 msec. The value set in the measurement counter is decremented each time the notification process is started.

  In the notification process, when the notification delay period measured using the measurement counter of the effect RAM 94 has elapsed (step S1204: YES), the notification start process is executed (step S1205). In the notification start processing, an image is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the data set in step S1202. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 8A, for example, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current stop order command is displayed on the image display device 63. The display of the image display device 63 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop in the current game.

  In the case of the above configuration, after the timing corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66 that is directly controlled by the main MPU 72, the directing MPU 92 directly outputs the information. The notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started in the image display device 63 whose display is controlled. Accordingly, when the notification regarding the winning combination is executed on the image display device 63, the notification regarding the winning combination is surely executed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and the reel executed on the image display device 63 is performed. In the case where the notification corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed by using the display content of the dual-purpose display unit 66, whether or not the notification is due to an improper act may be performed at an arbitrary timing. It becomes possible.

  The notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the dual-purpose display section 66 and the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63 end at the same or substantially the same timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After the notification corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the image display device 63 ends, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the dual-purpose display unit 66 ends. May be finished, and the order may be reversed.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the RT state processing (step S609). Note that, as described above, the processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, so the RT state processing is also executed when the game ends.

  First, the value of the RT game number counter of the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S1301). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the RT game number counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S1302). When the value of the RT game number counter is “0” (step S1302: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1303). That is, it is determined whether or not the game section is an advantageous section. As described above, in the RT state ST6, basically, an advantageous section is provided. However, the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs when the number of continued games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games (specifically, 1450 games). In this case, a normal section is set in the RT state ST6. Then, if the game is the final game in the RT state ST6 without setting the SB winning data in the RT state ST6 and a normal section, a negative determination is made in step S1303. On the other hand, when the final game in the RT state ST6 is reached in the RT state ST6 and the advantageous section, a positive determination is made in step S1303.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, a continuous lottery process is executed (step S1304). In the continuous lottery process, a continuous lottery table corresponding to the information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 stored in the main RAM 74 is read from the main ROM 73. Then, by comparing the value of the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 with the above-mentioned continuous lottery table, it is determined whether or not a continuous winning is achieved. As described above, there are six levels of probability of continuous winning in the continuous lottery process: 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90%, and 100%.

  If the winning is continued (step S1305: YES), the value of the state counter is set to “2” (step S1307), and the RT state processing ends. In this case, “1” is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 and the value of the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is “0”. Therefore, the state shifts to the first preparation state ST4 in the advantageous section where the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

  On the other hand, when the continuation is lost (step S1305: NO), the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1306), and the value of the state counter is set to "2" (step S1306). S1307), this RT state process ends. In this case, the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1” and the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1”. Accordingly, the process shifts to the first preparation state ST4 in a situation where the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section.

  Next, the relationship between the set value and the probability of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and the probability of providing a benefit relating to the RT state ST6 after the transition to the advantageous section will be described.

As described above, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section
Either of the following occurs: (1) when the game in which the SB winning data is set ends in the normal section, and (2) when the game in which the first BB prize is established ends in the normal section. Occurs when you do. Also, besides this,
(3) The transition to the advantageous section also occurs when the second promotion replay winning is established and the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in the normal section.

  The occurrence probability of any of the triggers (1) to (3) is common to all of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” of the slot machine 10. This will be described in detail. FIG. 30A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the point value PV set for each combination and the set value when the lottery process of the combination (FIG. 13) is executed in the normal state ST1.

  As described above, in the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6, the winning data set to the index values IV = 1 to 6 and their index values IV = 1 to 1 are also set. The point value PV set to 6 is the same as that in the normal state ST1. The winning data set with the index value IV = 7 is the normal replay winning data in any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6. Although common, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 7 differs depending on each of the gaming states ST1, ST3 to ST6. However, in any of the gaming states ST1, ST3 to ST6, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 7 is common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  As shown in FIG. 30A, the point values PV differ according to the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” among the index values IV = 1 to 7, that is, the winning combinations with different winning probabilities are the bell winning data. Is set to the index value IV = 1, the watermelon winning data is set to the index value IV = 2, the cherry winning data is set to the index value IV = 3, and the second BB winning data is set to the index value IV = 5. The index value IV = 4 in which the first BB winning data is set, the index value IV = 6 in which the SB winning data is set, and the index value IV = 7 in which the normal replay winning data are set are all won. The probability is common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In this case, the SB winning data for generating the trigger of the above (1) is set to the index value IV = 6. As a result, the probability of the occurrence of the trigger (1) is common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  The first BB winning data for generating the trigger of the above (2) is set to the index value IV = 4, and when the first BB winning data is set, the probability of the first BB winning being established is “setting 1”. The values are not changed according to the set value of “Setting 6” and are common. As a result, the probability of the occurrence of the trigger (2) is common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  As described above, in the second preparation state ST5, the reels 32L, 32M are won in the second preparation state ST5 in the stop order corresponding to the index value IV, which has been won, as described above. , 32R is stopped when the second promotion replay winning is established. In this case, the point value PV set to the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5 is common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, and the second preparation state In the state ST5 in the normal section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning regardless of the setting value of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is Not notified. As a result, the probability that the trigger of the above (3) occurs becomes common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Although index values IV = 8 to 13 also exist in the first preparation state ST4, the point values PV set to these index values IV = 8 to 13 are “setting 1” to “setting 6”. It is common to all setting values.

  In the above configuration, the index values IV = 1 to 3, 5 in which the winning probability fluctuates according to the set values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” are not set as the transition trigger of the advantageous section. Therefore, the probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. As a result, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from being caused by the set value with respect to the frequency of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section.

  In the configuration in which the probability of transition to the advantageous section is common to all set values as described above, when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed as described above, the benefit relating to the RT state ST6 is provided in the advantageous section. The probabilities are common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. More specifically, as described above, in both the case where the SB winning data is set and the case where the first BB prize is established, the game started first in the advantageous section when the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is performed. , A lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. This shift lottery process is surely executed in the game that is started first in the advantageous section when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, and the set value is determined based on whether or not the shift lottery processing is executed. Irrelevant.

  As described above, the tables referred to in the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 are the first table for the normal state (FIG. 21A) and the second table for the normal state in the normal state ST1. (FIG. 21 (b)), if it is in the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5, it is a table for various states (FIG. 21 (c)), and the RT state ST6. If it is, it is a table for the RT state (FIG. 21D), and if it is the first BB state, it is a table for the first BB state (FIG. 21E). Each of these tables is different in the winning probability and the selection mode of the continuation rate selected when the winning result is obtained, but is common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. As described above, the probability of shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Furthermore, if the second promotion replay winning is achieved in the normal section, the state shifts to the RT state ST6, which is an advantageous section, regardless of which of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Therefore, not only the frequency of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, but also the probability that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied when the transition to the advantageous section is made, at all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. It is common. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage due to the set value from being generated with respect to the probability that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied when the transition to the advantageous section is triggered.

  The transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first BB state, which is an advantageous section, and is also executed when a predetermined combination is won in a situation where the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. Further, in the first BB state, which is an advantageous section, and when the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, when a predetermined combination is won, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 can be promoted. The promotion lottery process is performed. In this case, the probability that the transfer lottery process and the promotion lottery process are executed, and the probability that a winning result is obtained in each lottery process are common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. . This will be described in detail. FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the point value PV set for each combination and the set value when the lottery process of the combination (FIG. 13) is executed in the first BB state.

  As shown in FIG. 30B, the index values IV = 1 to 4 have the winning probability common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In this case, in the first BB state, the predetermined combination that triggers the shift lottery process to the RT state ST6 and the continuation rate promotion lottery process are index values IV = 2 and 3. Further, when a predetermined combination is won in the first BB state, if the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is securely executed, and the process proceeds to the RT state ST6. If the transition condition is satisfied, the continuation rate promotion lottery process is reliably executed on condition that the maximum continuation rate is not reached. As a result, the probability that the predetermined lottery is won in the first BB state and the transfer lottery process or the promotion lottery process is executed is common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In addition, the probability of the transfer winning in the transfer lottery process executed in this case and the probability of being executed in the promotion lottery process are common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Thereby, it is possible to make the probability that the predetermined role is won in the first BB state and the profit is given for the RT state ST6 common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage caused by the set value from being given to the provision of the profit.

  Incidentally, even if the state shifts to the second BB state in the normal section, the shift to the advantageous section does not occur. Further, in the second BB state, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 30C, although the winning probability is common to all the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” for the index value IV = 1, , The index values IV = 2 to 4 have different winning probabilities depending on the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. Further, as described above, the winning probability of the index value IV = 5 in which the second BB winning data is set according to the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” in any of the game states ST1, ST3 to ST6. Different. On the other hand, in the second BB state, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 and the continuation rate promotion lottery process are not executed regardless of whether or not the predetermined combination is won.

  With the above-described configuration, the probability of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and the probability of providing the benefit relating to the RT state ST6 after the transition to the advantageous section are determined by the total of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. The setting values can be made common. Therefore, with respect to the probability of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and the probability that the benefit relating to the RT state ST6 is provided after the transition to the advantageous section, it is possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage due to the set value from occurring. .

  Next, a specific processing configuration for enabling various settings of the game section and a specific processing configuration for providing a benefit relating to the RT state ST6 will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a game section control process executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the control process of the game section is executed in step S601 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 22). Further, as described above, the processing at the end of the game is executed when the game ends, so the control processing of the game section is also executed when the game ends.

  First, the value of the total game number counter 74a provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1401). The total game number counter 74a is a counter for counting the number of played games regardless of the game state and the game section.

  In the game section control process, when the second promotion replay winning is achieved in the current game (step S1402: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74. Then, it is determined whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section (step S1403). If the current game section is not an advantageous section but a normal section (step S1403: NO), the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the advantageous start flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". Is set, and the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1404). Accordingly, when the second promotion replay winning is established in the normal section and the game shifts to the RT state ST6, the shift to the advantageous section occurs at the end of the game. Note that the advantageous start flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 72 that the first game has not yet started after the transition to the advantageous section.

  After that, a lighting process for turning on the advantageous section display section 67 is performed (step S1405). Thereby, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned on, and by visually checking the advantageous section display section 67, the manager of the gaming hall or the like grasps whether or not the section is an advantageous section. It becomes possible.

  After that, a continuation rate setting process is executed (step S1406). In the continuation rate setting process, the lowest continuation rate of 50%, which is the continuation rate of the RT state ST6, is stored in the main RAM 74. Thereby, the advantage in the case where the second promotion replay winning is established and the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified in the normal section, becomes extremely high. It is possible to prevent it from happening. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the highest continuation rate is selected, or a configuration in which an intermediate continuation rate is selected. Further, the lottery process is executed in the process of setting the continuation rate, so that any one of the six levels of continuation rates may be determined by the lottery. In this case, the configuration in which the probability of selecting the lowest continuation rate may be the highest, the configuration in which the probability of selecting the highest continuation rate is the highest, and the probability that the intermediate continuation rate is selected is the most It may be configured such that the expected value of the continuation rate is lower than in the case where the second promotion replay winning is established in the advantageous section and the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs, and the second promotion replay is performed in the advantageous section. The expected value of the continuation rate may be higher than the case where the winning is established and the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs.

  If the current game section is an advantageous section (step S1403: YES), it is determined whether the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1407). As described above, the advantageous end preparation flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 72 that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section, and "1" is set to the advantageous end preparation flag. If it is, it means that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section. If the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "1" (step S1407: YES), after clearing the value of the advantageous end preparation flag to "0" (step S1408), the continuation rate setting process described above is executed. (Step S1406). Thus, if the second promotion replay winning is established and the game shifts to the RT state ST6 in a situation where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section, the game is shifted to the RT state ST6 at the end of the game. The transition condition is satisfied, and the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set.

  In the control process of the game section, when the value of the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is “0”, that is, when the game section is a normal section, and the SB winning data is set in this game (step In step S1409 and step S1410: YES), each of the advantageous section flag and the advantageous start flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the value of the continuous game number counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1411). As a result, when the SB winning data is set in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section occurs at the end of the game. In addition, a lighting process for turning on the advantageous section display unit 67 is performed (step S1412). Thereby, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned on, and by visually checking the advantageous section display section 67, the manager of the gaming hall or the like grasps whether or not the section is an advantageous section. It becomes possible.

  In the game section control process, when the value of the advantageous section flag in the main RAM 74 is “0”, that is, when the game section is a normal section, and the first BB prize is established in the current game (step S1409) And step S1413: YES), set “1” to each of the advantageous section flag and the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74, and clear the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 to “0” (step S1414). Accordingly, when the first BB prize is established in the normal section, a shift to the advantageous section occurs at the end of the game. In addition, a lighting process for turning on the advantageous section display unit 67 is performed (step S1415). Thereby, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned on, and by visually checking the advantageous section display section 67, the manager of the gaming hall or the like grasps whether or not the section is an advantageous section. It becomes possible.

  Here, in order to execute the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 when the SB winning data is set in the normal section and the process proceeds to the advantageous section, or when the first BB prize is established in the normal section and the process proceeds to the advantageous section. The configuration of the processing will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the transition trigger processing of the RT state ST6 executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the transition trigger processing of the RT state ST6 is executed in step S413 in the lottery processing of the winning combination (FIG. 13). Further, the lottery process of the winning combination is executed when the game is started, so that the transition trigger process of the RT state ST6 is also executed when the game is started.

  First, by determining whether or not “1” is set in the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the game is started first after the transition to the advantageous section occurs ( Step S1501). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, after clearing the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S1502), it is determined whether or not information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main RAM 74. A determination is made (step S1503). The case where the advantageous start flag is set to “1” and the information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set means that the second promoted replay prize is established in the normal section, and the state is changed to the advantageous section. This corresponds to the situation where the migration occurred. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, and the present transition trigger process ends. On the other hand, when the SB winning data is set in the normal section or when the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the advantageous start flag is set to “1” and the continuation rate information of the RT state ST6 is set. Not in a situation. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1503.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1503, a lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is executed (step S1504). In the shift lottery process, if the current gaming state is the normal state ST1, the value of the ceiling game number counter of the main RAM 74 is checked, and the remaining game number up to the normal side upper limit game number in the normal state ST1 is 50 games. It is determined whether the number is larger than the number. If the number of remaining games up to the normal-side upper limit game number in the normal state ST1 is larger than 50 games, the first table for the normal state (FIG. 21A) is read from the main ROM 73, and the normal state ST1 is read. When the number of remaining games up to the normal upper limit game number is 50 games or less, the second table for the normal state (FIG. 21B) is read. If the current gaming state is any of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5, a table for various states (FIG. 21C) is read from the main ROM 73. Also, if the current gaming state is the RT state ST6, the RT state table (FIG. 21D) is read from the main ROM 73. If the current gaming state is the first BB state, the first BB state table (FIG. 21 (e)) is read from the main ROM 73. In the transfer lottery process, after reading any one of the tables, the value of the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read value of the lottery counter is compared with the read table. .

  If the result of the lottery process that shifts to the RT state ST6 is a departure result (step S1505: NO), “1” is set to the advantageous end preparation flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1506). As described above, the advantageous end preparation flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 72 that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section, and "1" is set to the advantageous end preparation flag. If it is, it means that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section. Therefore, when the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "1", the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the first promotion replay winning even in the advantageous section in the first preparation state ST4 are stopped. The order is not notified, and if the advantageous end preparation flag is set to "1", the second promotion replay winning can be established even in the advantageous section in the second preparation state ST5. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not notified.

  If the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is a winning result (step S1505: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1507). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. Further, a continuation rate storage process is executed (step S1508). In the processing of storing the continuation rate, the main RAM 74 stores information of the continuation rate selected when the winning result is obtained in the lottery processing for transition to the RT state ST6.

  When the process shifts to the advantageous section due to the above-described processing configuration, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed in the game started first in the advantageous section. The transfer lottery process is performed in a lottery mode according to the game state at that time.

  How the lottery process is shifted to the RT state ST6 in the normal state ST1 will be described with reference to a time chart of FIG. FIG. 33A shows a period in which the game section is an advantageous section, FIG. 33B shows a period in the normal state ST1, and FIG. 33C shows a normal upper limit game in the normal state ST1. 33 (e) shows a period in which the number of remaining games up to the number of games is 50 or less (hereinafter, this period is also referred to as a ceiling front period). FIG. Shows the timing at which the lottery process is shifted to the RT state ST6, FIG. 33 (f) shows a period in which the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and FIG. FIG. 33 (h) shows a period in the second preparation state ST5, and FIG. 33 (i) shows a period in the RT state ST6.

  First, the case where the SB winning data is set only before the ceiling front period in the normal state ST1 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a) and FIG. 33 (b), SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 33 (d) at the timing of t1, which is the normal section and the state of the normal state ST1. In this case, at the end of the game in which the SB winning data is set, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. At time t2, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed as shown in FIG. In this case, since the first table for the normal state (FIG. 21A) is referred to, the result of the transfer lottery process is surely a departure result. Therefore, at the timing of the t2, "1" is set to the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. Although the detailed processing configuration will be described later, when the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1” in the normal state ST1 and the advantageous section, the lottery processing to the RT state ST6 is executed. At the end of the played game, that is, at the end of the first game executed after shifting to the advantageous section, initialization processing of the advantageous section is executed. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the gaming section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. 33 (a), and the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 33 (f). You.

  After that, at the timing of t4, the number of remaining games up to the normal-side upper limit game number in the normal state ST1 becomes 50 or less, so that the front ceiling period is reached as shown in FIG. In this front ceiling period, the SB winning data is not set, and the number of games continued in the normal state ST1 at the timing of t5 reaches the normal side upper limit game number. At the end of the period, the gaming state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the first preparation state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (g). The first preparation state ST4 is started in a situation where the game section is a normal section. In the first preparation state ST4 and in a situation where the section is a normal section, one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won in the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 13). In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the first promotion replay winning is not notified. Since the first promotion replay prize cannot be established in this game, the gaming state changes from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state at the timing of t6 as shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (g). Move to ST1.

  Next, a case where SB winning data is set in the ceiling front period in the normal state ST1 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), the remaining number of games up to the normal-side upper limit game number in the normal state ST1 is 50 or less at the timing t7 in the normal section and the normal state ST1. Thus, the period before the ceiling is reached as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing of t8, which is the period before the ceiling, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. In this case, at the end of the game in which the SB winning data is set, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. At time t9, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed as shown in FIG. In this case, since the second table for the normal state (FIG. 21B) is referred to, the result of the transfer lottery process is surely a winning result. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", and the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is maintained at "0". Although the detailed processing configuration will be described later, if the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is “0” in the normal state ST1 and the advantageous section, the advantageous section is maintained.

  Thereafter, when the number of games continued in the normal state ST1 at the timing of t10 reaches the upper limit number of games on the normal side, the front-end period ends as shown in FIG. As shown in (g), the game state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the first preparation state ST4. The first preparation state ST4 is started in a state where the game section is an advantageous section and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. In the first preparation state ST4 and a situation where the section is an advantageous section, the player wins any one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first promotion replay winning is notified. Then, by establishing the first promotion replay winning in this game, the game state changes from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5 at the timing of t11 as shown in FIGS. 33 (g) and 33 (h). Move to

  The second preparation state ST5 is started in a state where the game section is an advantageous section and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. In the second preparation state ST5 and a situation where the section is an advantageous section, the player wins one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay winning is notified. Then, by establishing the second promotion replay winning in this game, the game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6 at the timing of t12 as shown in FIGS. 33 (h) and 33 (i). I do.

  With the above configuration, when the SB winning data is set in the normal state ST1 and in the period before the ceiling, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. Thereby, it is possible to compensate for staying in the normal state ST1 for a long time without generating both the BB state ST2 and the RT state ST6.

  In the normal state ST1, when the number of continuous games in the normal state ST1 reaches the normal-side upper limit game number without setting the SB winning data in the period before the ceiling, the game enters the first preparation state ST4 in the normal section. Transition. Thus, it is possible to increase the importance of setting the SB winning data in the limited period of the ceiling front period, and it is possible to increase the attention of the game in the ceiling front period.

  Even if the SB winning data is set in the period before the ceiling and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, the normal state ST1 does not end in the middle, and the number of continuous games in the normal state ST1 becomes the normal side upper limit game number. When the game state is reached, the game state shifts from the normal state ST1 to the first preparation state ST4. This makes it possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects while keeping the game state transition processing constant.

  Next, BB processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The BB processing is executed in step S602 in the processing at the end of the game (FIG. 22). Further, as described above, the processing at the time of terminating the game is executed when the game ends, so that the BB processing is also executed when the game ends.

  If the first BB prize has been established in this game (step S1601: YES), “1” is set to the first BB flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1602). The first BB flag is a flag for specifying the first BB state by the main MPU 72. Thereafter, the value of the total payout counter provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1603). The total payout counter is a counter for measuring the total number of game media given to the player in one BB state ST2 by the main MPU 72.

  If the second BB prize has been established in the current game (step S1604: YES), “1” is set to the second BB flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1605). The second BB flag is a flag for specifying the second BB state by the main MPU 72. Thereafter, the value of the total payout counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1603).

  If “1” is set in the first BB flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1606: YES), a first BB process for controlling the progress of the first BB state is executed (step S1607). If “1” is set in the second BB flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1608: YES), a second BB process for controlling the progress of the second BB state is executed (step S1609).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the first BB process of step S1607.

  If the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the situation of the advantageous section (step S1701: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set to the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S1701). S1702). When the first BB prize is established in the normal section, as described above, when the first game in the first BB state is started, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 (step S1504) is executed. If the result of the shift lottery process is off, "1" is set to the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S1702.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, a lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is executed (step S1703). In the transfer lottery process, the transfer table in the BB corresponding to the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73, the value of the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read lottery counter is read. Is checked against the transition table in the BB. In the transition table in the BB corresponding to the index value IV = 2, the probability of the transition winning to the RT state ST6 is set to 25%. Further, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 that can be selected when the winning result is obtained is the lower four of the six steps, and the select rates of the four steps are equal. In the transition table in the BB corresponding to the index value IV = 3, the probability of the transition winning to the RT state ST6 is set to 50%. In addition, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 that can be selected when the winning result is obtained is four levels excluding the maximum of 100% and the minimum of 50%, and the selection rates of these four levels are equal. .

  If the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is a winning result (step S1704: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1705). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. In addition, a continuation rate storage process is executed (step S1706). In the process of storing the continuation rate, the main RAM 74 stores information on the continuation rate selected when the winning result is obtained in the lottery processing for shifting to the RT state ST6 in step S1703. If the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is a departure result (step S1704: NO), since the process of step S1705 is not executed, "1" is set to the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74. State is maintained.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1702, Since it means that the transition condition to the RT state ST6 has already been satisfied, It is not a lottery process to shift to the RT state ST6, A continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed (step S1707). In the promotion lottery process, The promotion table corresponding to the winning role is read from the main ROM 73, The main RAM 74 reads a value of a lottery counter that is periodically updated, The read value of the lottery counter is checked against the promotion table. In the promotion table corresponding to the index value IV = 2, the probability of the promotion winning is set to 25%. In the promotion table corresponding to the index value IV = 3, the probability of the promotion winning is set to 50%. In addition, If the maximum continuation rate has already been reached, the continuation rate promotion lottery process (step S1707) is not executed.

  If the result of the continuation rate promotion lottery process is a winning result (step S1708: YES), the continuation rate is updated (step S1709). In the update processing of the continuation rate, the continuation rate information stored in the main RAM 74 is updated so that the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 becomes a continuation rate one step higher.

  In the first BB process, in addition to the above-described various processes, it is determined whether or not a game medium has been added in the current game (step S1710). When the provision of the game media has occurred (step S1710: YES), the information of the number of the game media provided in the current game is added to the total payout counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1711). When the value of the total payout counter after the addition is equal to or more than the termination reference number (for example, “350”) (step S1712: YES), the first BB flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” (step S1713). Thus, the first BB state ends. In addition, when the first BB flag is cleared to “0”, the first BB end command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92, and the production side MPU 92 that has received the first BB end command performs the end production in the first BB state. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 may be configured to be controlled. Further, “1” is set to the state counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1714). As a result, the post-bonus state processing (step S606) is executed in the processing (FIG. 22) corresponding to the end of the next game.

  FIG. 36 is a time chart for explaining the progress of the game when the first BB state occurs. FIG. 36A shows a period in which the gaming section is an advantageous section, FIG. 36B shows a period in which the gaming state is in the normal state ST1, and FIG. FIG. 36 (d) shows the setting status of the advantageous end preparation flag in the main RAM 74, and FIG. 36 (e) shows the shift lottery processing to the RT state ST6 and the promotion lottery processing of the continuation rate. 36 (f) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the post-bonus state ST3, and FIG. 36 (g) shows a timing in which the gaming state is in the third state. FIG. 36 (h) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the second preparation state ST5, and FIG. 36 (i) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the RT state ST6. Indicates the period.

  First, a description will be given of a case where a transition to a first BB state is made in the normal section, and a transitional winning is achieved in a transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed in the first game of the first BB state.

  When the first BB prize is established at the timing of t1, which is the normal state in the normal state ST1, the gaming state changes from the normal state ST1 to the first BB as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 36 (c). At the same time, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. By the transfer winning in the transfer lottery process, the advantageous finish preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to “1” as shown in FIG. Is maintained. As a result, the condition is satisfied and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2 in the middle of the first BB state, by winning the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the BB state ST2, the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate is executed as shown in FIG. If the winning result is obtained in the promotion lottery process, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 set at the timing of t1 is promoted by one step, and if the result is out of the promotion lottery process, it is set at the timing of t1. The continuation rate of the performed RT state ST6 is maintained.

  Thereafter, when the total number of game media provided in the first BB state at the timing of t3 becomes equal to or more than the end reference number, the game state is changed from the first BB state as shown in FIGS. 36 (c) and 36 (f). The state shifts to the post-bonus state ST3. In this case, the state shifts to the post-bonus state ST3 in the advantageous section where the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

  Thereafter, the SB winning data is set at the timing of t4 and the SB winning is not established, so that the gaming state changes from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 36 (f) and 36 (g). Move to Since the SB winning data is set in the advantageous section, even if the SB winning data is set, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not executed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in accordance with the notified stop order, and the first promotion replay winning is established. Thus, the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5. Further, at the timing of t6, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, and the second promotion replay winning is established. As described above, the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6.

  As described above, the transition to the RT state ST6, which is executed in the first game that has transitioned to the first BB state, results in a winning result in the lottery process, and basically the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs. . Thus, for example, in a situation where the player is staying in the normal state ST1, the player expects the first BB state to occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, when a winning result is obtained in the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed in the first game shifted to the first BB state, the player wins the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the first BB state. Each time a continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed, and a winning result is obtained in the promotion lottery process, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is promoted by one step. Thus, when the player shifts to the first BB state, the player expects that the player will win the shift to the RT state ST6 at an early stage, and also expects to win the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the first BB state. Will be done. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in the first BB state.

  Next, a case where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the first BB state when the transition to the first BB state in the normal section will be described.

  When the first BB prize is established at the timing of t7, which is the normal section and the state of the normal state ST1, the gaming state changes from the normal state ST1 to the first BB as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 36 (c). At the same time, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. As a result of the departure in the transfer lottery process, “1” is set to the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. As a result, a situation is reached in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section.

  Thereafter, at the timing t8 in the middle of the first BB state, by winning the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the BB state ST2, the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed again as shown in FIG. Is done. As a result of the shift lottery processing also results in a departure, the state in which the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" is maintained as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, at time t9, the total number of game media provided in the first BB state becomes equal to or more than the end reference number, and the gaming state is changed from the first BB state as shown in FIGS. The state shifts to post-bonus state ST3. In this case, the process shifts to the post-bonus state ST3 in a situation where the shift condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section.

  Thereafter, the SB winning data is set at the timing of t10 and the SB prize is not established, so that the gaming state changes from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 36 (f) and 36 (g). Move to Since the SB winning data is set in the advantageous section, even if the SB winning data is set, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not executed.

  After that, at the timing of t11, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the first promotion replay winning is not notified even though the first promotion replay winning data is set, so that the game is played. As a result, the first promotion replay prize winning is missed. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 36 (b) and FIG. 36 (g), the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1. In this case, by executing the advantageous section initialization processing, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. 36A, and the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 36D. Is cleared to "0".

  Next, a case where the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in a game after the first game in the first BB state will be described.

  When the first BB prize is established at the timing of t12, which is a normal section and the state of the normal state ST1, the gaming state changes from the normal state ST1 to the first BB as shown in FIGS. 36 (b) and 36 (c). At the same time, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 36 (e), a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. As a result of the departure in the transfer lottery process, “1” is set to the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. As a result, a situation is reached in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the advantageous section.

  Thereafter, at time t13 in the middle of the first BB state, the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the BB state ST2 is won, so that the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed again as shown in FIG. Is done. By the transfer winning in the transfer lottery process, the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. As a result, the condition is satisfied and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. After that, at the timings t14 to t17, the same events as those at the timings t3 to t6 occur.

  As described above, even if the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 executed in the first game shifted to the first BB state results in a win, the index value IV = 2 or 3 is won in the first BB state. As a result, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed again, and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied by obtaining a winning result in the transition lottery process. This makes it possible to increase the frequency at which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the case of transition to the first BB state, and to increase the player's expectation of transition to the first BB state.

  When a winning result is obtained in the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6, an effect or notification corresponding thereto may be executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, or the image display device 63. The configuration may not be performed. In the case of the configuration in which the effect or notification is executed, the player expects that the effect or notification is executed in the game that has shifted to the first BB state, and the game that has shifted to the first BB state. Even if the effect or the notification is not executed, the player expects that the effect or the information is executed every time the index value IV = 2 or 3 is won. Further, if the winning result is obtained in the continuation rate promotion lottery process after the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, the effect or notification corresponding thereto is transmitted to the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, or the image display device 63. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the execution is performed or not.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the second BB process of step S1609 in the BB process (FIG. 34).

  If a game medium has been provided in the current game (step S1801: YES), information on the number of game media provided in the current game is added to the total payout counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1802). . Then, when the value of the total payout counter after the addition is equal to or more than the end reference number (for example, “350”) (step S1803: YES), the second BB flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to “0” (step S1804). Thus, the second BB state ends. In addition, when the second BB flag is cleared to “0”, the second BB end command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92, and the production side MPU 92 that has received the second BB end command performs the end production in the second BB state, The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 may be configured to be controlled. Further, “1” is set to the state counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1805). As a result, the post-bonus state processing (step S606) is executed in the processing (FIG. 22) corresponding to the end of the next game.

  As described above, in the second BB state, the shift lottery process to the RT state ST6 and the continuation rate promotion lottery process are not executed regardless of the result of the winning lottery process. As described above, the probability that the second BB winning data is set is different between the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”. In such a configuration, in the second BB state, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 and the continuation rate promotion lottery process are not performed, so that the transition to the second BB state having a difference in the occurrence probabilities triggers the RT. It is possible to prevent the condition for shifting to the state ST6 from being satisfied.

  FIG. 38 is a time chart for explaining the progress of the game when the second BB state occurs. FIG. 38 (a) shows a period in which the gaming section is an advantageous section, FIG. 38 (b) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the normal state ST1, and FIG. FIG. 38 (d) shows the setting state of the advantageous end preparation flag in the main RAM 74, and FIG. 38 (e) shows the timing at which the lottery process is shifted to the RT state ST6. 38 (f) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the post-bonus state ST3, FIG. 38 (g) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the first preparation state ST4, and FIG. FIG. 38 (i) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the second preparation state ST5, and FIG. 38 (i) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the RT state ST6.

  The second BB prize is established at the timing of t1, which is the normal state in the normal state ST1, and the gaming state is changed from the normal state ST1 to the second BB as shown in FIGS. 38 (b) and 38 (c). Transition to the state. However, unlike the case of the first BB state, even if the game section shifts to the second BB state, the game section does not shift to the advantageous section and the normal section is maintained. Then, the normal section is maintained until the second BB state ends. Further, the value of the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is maintained at "0" as shown in FIG. When the transition to the second BB state occurs in the advantageous section of the gaming section, the advantageous section is maintained without shifting to the normal section in the gaming section.

  Thereafter, when the total number of game media provided in the second BB state at the timing of t2 becomes equal to or more than the end reference number, the gaming state is changed from the second BB state as shown in FIGS. 38 (c) and 38 (f). The state shifts to post-bonus state ST3. In this case, the state is the post-bonus state ST3, which is a normal section.

  The post-bonus state ST3 continues as described above until the SB winning data is set and the SB winning is not established. At the timing of t3, the SB winning data is set and the SB winning is not established, so that the gaming state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4 as shown in FIGS. 38 (f) and 38 (g). At the same time, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. Also, at the timing of the t3, as shown in FIG. 38 (e), a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. The transfer lottery process is executed in the first preparation state ST4. However, as described above, in the transfer lottery process executed in any of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5. The result of winning is reliably obtained by referring to the table for various states (FIG. 21C). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 38D, the state in which the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "0" is maintained. As a result, the condition is satisfied and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

  After that, at the timing of t4, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in accordance with the notified stop order, and the first promotion replay winning is established, and thus, shown in FIGS. 38 (g) and 38 (h). Thus, the game state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5. At the timing of t5, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped according to the notified stop order, and the second promotion replay winning is established. As described above, the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6.

  As described above, when the state transits to the second BB state in the state of the normal section, the state of the normal section is maintained until the second BB state ends and the state transits to the post-bonus state ST3. Then, the post-bonus state ST3 continues until at least the SB winning data is set, and a table for various states that ensures a winning result when the SB winning data is set in the normal section (FIG. 21C )), A lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. Accordingly, when the second BB state occurs in the normal section, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 can be surely satisfied, triggered by the subsequent setting of the SB winning data. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the second BB state.

  Next, a processing configuration for performing the end control of the advantageous section will be described.

  As described above, in step S1409 in the game section control process (FIG. 31), it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the game section is an advantageous section. Is determined. If it is the advantageous section (step S1409: YES), first, the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1416). The advantageous game number counter 74b is a counter for counting the number of games continuously consumed in a situation where the game section is an advantageous section. Even if it occurs, the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b is maintained without being cleared. Note that the process of step S1416 is not executed in the control process of the game section in the process in which the process of step S1404 has been executed. Thereafter, an advantageous section end process is executed (step S1417).

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section end process. Note that, as described above, since the control process for the game section is executed when the game ends, the process for ending the advantageous section is also executed when the game ends.

  First, it is determined whether or not a condition for shifting to the normal state ST1 has been satisfied in the current game (step S1901). Specifically, when the first promotion replay winning data is set in the first preparation state ST4 but the first promotion replay winning is not established, it is determined that the condition for shifting to the normal state ST1 is established. . In addition, when the second promotion replay winning data is set in the second preparation state ST5 but the second promotion replay winning is not established, it is determined that the condition for shifting to the normal state ST1 is established.

  When the condition for shifting to the normal state ST1 is satisfied in the current game (step S1901: YES), an advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S1902). In the initialization process of the advantageous section, various information on the advantageous section stored in the main RAM 74 is initialized. Specifically, the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is also deleted. Thereby, the game section shifts to the normal section. That is, the state is the normal state ST1 and the normal section. Thereafter, a light-off process for turning off the advantageous section display unit 67 is performed (step S1903). Thereby, when the advantageous section ends and the normal section is started, the advantageous section display section 67 is turned off, and by visually confirming the advantageous section display section 67, the manager of the game hall is the advantageous section. It is possible to grasp whether or not.

  Even in the normal state ST1 in which the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (steps S1904 and S1905: YES), the advantageous section is initialized (step S1906). Then, the light-off process of the advantageous section display section 67 is executed (step S1907). The processing contents of steps S1906 and S1907 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1902 and S1903.

  The situation in which an affirmative determination is made in both step S1904 and step S1905 is a situation in which the game is in the normal state ST1 and is a normal section, and the number of remaining games up to the normal upper limit game number in the normal state ST1 exceeds 50 games. In this situation, the transition to the advantageous section is triggered by the fact that the SB winning data is set. In this case, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first game that has transitioned to the advantageous section, and the transition lottery process is performed with reference to the first table for the normal state (FIG. 21A). Since the process is executed, the result of the transfer lottery process surely becomes a departure result. If the result is off, "1" is set to the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74. In this configuration, when an affirmative determination is made in both step S1904 and step S1905, initialization processing of the advantageous section is performed so that the state is the normal state ST1 and the normal section. In the situation where the number of remaining games up to the normal side upper limit game number in state ST1 exceeds 50 games, if the transition to the advantageous section is triggered by the setting of the SB winning data, the first transition to the advantageous section is made. It is possible to end the advantageous section in the game.

  If a negative determination is made in any of steps S1901, S1904, and S1905, the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1908). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the second promotion replay winning has been achieved in the current game (step S1909). If the second promotion replay winning has not been achieved (step S1909: NO), the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 becomes equal to or more than the value of the upper limit game number of the advantageous section (specifically, 1500 games). It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S1910). If the number of games is equal to or more than the upper limit game number, it means that the number of games continued without shifting to the normal section in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit game number. (Step S1911), the light-off process of the advantageous section display section 67 is executed (Step S1912). The processing contents of steps S1911 and S1912 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1902 and S1903.

  On the other hand, when the second promotion replay winning has been achieved in the current game (step S1909: YES), it means that the gaming state has shifted from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6 in the current game. In this case, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is equal to or more than the value of the number of trigger games (specifically, 1450 games) (step S1913). If the number of trigger games is equal to or greater than the value, the new transition to the RT state ST6 occurs when the number of games continued without shifting to the normal section in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games. Therefore, the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed (step S1911), and the turning off process of the advantageous section display unit 67 is executed (step S1912). The processing contents of steps S1911 and S1912 are the same as the processing contents of steps S1902 and S1903.

  Hereinafter, the manner in which the advantageous section is forcibly terminated in relation to the number of continuous games in the advantageous section will be described. First, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 40, a description will be given of how the advantageous section is forcibly terminated when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number. FIG. 40 (a) shows a period in which the game section is an advantageous section, FIG. 40 (b) shows a timing when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, and FIG. 40 (c) shows the SB win. FIG. 40 (d) shows the timing at which the data is set, FIG. 40 (d) shows the timing at which the shift lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed, and FIG. 40 (e) shows the period during which the gaming state is the normal state ST1. 40 (f) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the first BB state, FIG. 40 (g) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the post-bonus state ST3, and FIG. 40 (h) shows a gaming state. Shows a period in which the game state is in the first preparation state ST4, and FIG. 40 (i) shows a period in which the game state is in the second preparation state ST5.

  First, a case where the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the first BB state will be described. At the timing of t1 in the first BB state and the situation of the advantageous section, the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number as shown in FIG. In this case, even in the middle of the first BB state, by executing the initialization process of the advantageous section, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. In the first BB state, if it is an advantageous section, the winning lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 or the continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 2 or 3, but in the normal section. , Even if the winning is made with the index value IV = 2 or 3, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 and the continuation rate promotion lottery process are not executed.

  When the game section shifts to the normal section in the middle of the first BB state, the normal section continues until the first BB state ends. Thereafter, when the end condition of the first BB state is satisfied at the timing of t2, the gaming state shifts from the first BB state to the post-bonus state ST3 as shown in FIGS. 40 (f) and 40 (g). The post-bonus state ST3 continues until at least SB winning data is set. Then, at time t3, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 40 (c) and the SB winning is not established, so that the gaming state becomes a bonus as shown in FIGS. 40 (g) and 40 (h). The state shifts from the post-state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4. Further, at the timing of the t3, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. After that, at the timing t4 when the first game is started in the advantageous section, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed as shown in FIG. 40D. In the transfer lottery process, since the tables for various states (FIG. 21C) are referred to, the winning result is assured. Therefore, the state is an advantageous section and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

  As described above, when the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the first BB state and the transition to the normal section occurs, the normal section after the end of the first BB state and the post-bonus state The situation becomes ST3. Then, the post-bonus state ST3 is continued at least until the SB winning data is set, and when the SB winning data is set, the process goes to the RT state ST6 with reference to the various state tables (FIG. 21C). Since the transfer lottery process is executed, the winning result is assured. Therefore, when the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number in the middle of the first BB state, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied after the end of the first BB state. The player expects that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section will reach the upper limit number of games.

  Note that, even when the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number in the middle of the second BB state, the second BB is set in the same manner as when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number in the middle of the first BB state. After the end of the state, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

  Next, a case where the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of post-bonus state ST3 will be described. At the timing of t5, which is the post-bonus state ST3, which is an advantageous section, the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number as shown in FIG. 40 (b). In this case, even in the middle of the post-bonus state ST3, the initialization of the advantageous section is performed, so that the gaming section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG.

  The post-bonus state ST3, which is a normal section, continues at least until SB winning data is set. Then, at time t6, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 40 (c), and the SB winning is not established, so that the gaming state becomes a bonus as shown in FIGS. 40 (g) and 40 (h). The state shifts from the post-state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4. Further, at the timing of the t6, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing t7 when the first game is started in the advantageous section, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed as shown in FIG. 40 (d). In the transfer lottery process, since the tables for various states (FIG. 21C) are referred to, the winning result is assured. Therefore, the state is an advantageous section and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

  As described above, when the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and the transition to the normal section occurs during the post-bonus state ST3, the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3. The lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the table for various states (FIG. 21 (c)), and the winning result is assured. Therefore, when the number of games continued in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the post-bonus state ST3, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. The player expects the number of continuous games to reach the upper limit number of games.

  Next, a case where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the first preparation state ST4 will be described.

  At the timing of t8, which is the first preparation state ST4 and a situation of an advantageous section, the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number as shown in FIG. 40B. In this case, even in the middle of the first preparation state ST4, the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed, so that the gaming section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the first promotion replay winning data is set before the SB winning data is set. In this case, since the game section is the normal section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the first promotion replay winning is not notified. Accordingly, an event occurs in which the first promotion replay winning data is set at the timing of t9 but the first promotion replay winning is not established, and the gaming state is changed as shown in FIGS. 40 (e) and 40 (h). The state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1.

  On the other hand, if the SB winning data is set before the first promotion replay winning data is set after the situation is the normal section and the first preparation state ST4, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. It will be established. This case will be described.

  At the timing of t10 in the first preparation state ST4, which is a situation of an advantageous section, the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number as shown in FIG. 40 (b). In this case, even in the middle of the first preparation state ST4, the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed, so that the gaming section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at time t11, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 40 (c), and the SB winning is not established. As a result, while the first preparation state ST4 is maintained as shown in FIG. 40 (h), the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 40 (a). After that, at the timing t12 when the first game is started in the advantageous section, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed as shown in FIG. 40 (d). In the transfer lottery process, since the tables for various states (FIG. 21C) are referred to, the winning result is assured. Therefore, the state is an advantageous section and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the first promotion replay winning is notified. Therefore, when the first promotion replay winning data is set at the timing of t13, the first promotion replay winning is basically established, and the gaming state is changed as shown in FIG. 40 (h) and FIG. 40 (i). The state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5.

  As described above, when the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games and the transition to the normal section occurs during the first preparation state ST4, before the first promotion replay winning data is set. , The winning lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the table for various states (FIG. 21C), and the winning result is assured. Therefore, when the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the first preparation state ST4, the SB winning data is set before the first promotion replay winning data is set. The player expects, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that the first preparation is performed by causing the image display device 63 to execute an effect or a notification so that the player can recognize whether the game section is the normal section or the advantageous section. The player can know that the advantageous section has ended in the middle of the state ST4 and has shifted to the normal section. By letting the player know that the section is in the normal section and in the first preparation state ST4, the SB winning data is set before the first promotion replay winning data is set. The game in the first preparation state ST4 is performed with expectation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the first preparation state ST4.

  Next, a case will be described in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games during the second preparation state ST5.

  At the timing t14 in the second preparation state ST5, which is a situation of an advantageous section, the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number as shown in FIG. In this case, even in the middle of the second preparation state ST5, the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed, so that the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the second promotion replay winning data is set before the SB winning data is set. In this case, since the game section is the normal section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the second promotion replay winning is not notified. Therefore, an event occurs in which the second promotion replay winning data is set at the timing of t15 but the second promotion replay winning is not established, and the gaming state is changed as shown in FIGS. 40 (e) and 40 (i). The state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the normal state ST1.

  On the other hand, if the SB winning data is set before the second promotion replay winning data is set after the normal section and the second preparation state ST5 is reached, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. It will be established. This case will be described.

  At the timing of t16 in the second preparation state ST5, which is a situation of an advantageous section, the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number as shown in FIG. In this case, even in the middle of the second preparation state ST5, the initialization process of the advantageous section is executed, so that the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at time t17, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 40 (c), and the SB winning is not established. Thereby, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section as shown in FIG. 40 (a) while the second preparation state ST5 is maintained as shown in FIG. 40 (i). Thereafter, at time t18 when the first game is started in the advantageous section, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed as shown in FIG. 40D. In the transfer lottery process, since the tables for various states (FIG. 21C) are referred to, the winning result is assured. Therefore, the state is an advantageous section and the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. In this case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the second promotion replay winning is notified. Therefore, when the second promotion replay winning data is set at the timing of t19, the second promotion replay winning is basically established, and the gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6.

  As described above, when the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number and the transition to the normal section occurs during the second preparation state ST5, the second promotion replay winning data is set before the setting. , The winning lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the table for various states (FIG. 21C), and the winning result is assured. Therefore, when the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number in the middle of the second preparation state ST5, the SB winning data is set before the second promotion replay winning data is set. The player is expected to be able to improve the interest of the game.

  The second preparation is performed by performing an effect or notification on the image display device 63 so that the player can recognize whether the game section is a normal section or an advantageous section. The player can know that the advantageous section has ended in the middle of the state ST5 and has shifted to the normal section. Then, by letting the player know that the game is in the second preparation state ST5 and is a normal section, the SB winning data is set before the second promotion replay winning data is set. The game in the second preparation state ST5 is performed while expecting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in the second preparation state ST5.

  Next, referring to the time chart of FIG. 41, when the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of trigger games, the advantageous section is forcibly ended. Will be described. FIG. 41 (a) shows a period in which the game section is an advantageous section, FIG. 41 (b) shows the timing when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the number of trigger games, and FIG. 41 (c) shows the SB win FIG. 41 (d) shows the timing at which the data is set, FIG. 41 (d) shows the timing at which the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed, and FIG. 41 (e) shows the period during which the gaming state is in the RT state ST6. 40 (f) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the first preparation state ST4, FIG. 40 (g) shows a period in which the gaming state is in the second preparation state ST5, and FIG. 40 (h). Indicates a period in which the gaming state is in the normal state ST1.

  First, a case where SB winning data is set in a normal section in the RT state ST6 will be described.

  At the timing of t1 in the second preparation state ST5, which is a situation of an advantageous section, the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the number of opportunity games as shown in FIG. However, even if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the number of trigger games, the game section is maintained in the advantageous section as shown in FIG. After that, the second promotion replay prize is established at the timing t2 when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the number of opportunity games and less than the upper limit number of games. ), The game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6. In this case, since the state has shifted to the RT state ST6 in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the number of opportunity games, the gaming section is changed to the advantageous section at the timing of the t2 as shown in FIG. To normal section.

  Thereafter, the SB winning data is set as shown in FIG. 41 (c) at the timing of t3 which is the RT state ST6, which is a situation that is a normal section, so that the timing shown in FIG. Thus, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section. Thereafter, at time t4 when the first game is started in the advantageous section, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed as shown in FIG. 41 (d). In the transfer lottery process, since the table for the RT state (FIG. 21D) is referred to, the winning result is surely obtained, and 100% is selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. Therefore, basically, the state in which the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is maintained until the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the number of trigger games or the upper limit number of games. Therefore, even if the RT state ST6 ends once as shown in FIG. 41D at the timing of t5, the first preparation state ST4 is changed from the timing of t5 to the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 41F. The second preparation state ST5 is performed as shown in FIG. 41 (g) from the timing t6 to the timing t7 as shown in FIG. 41 (g), and again the transition to the RT state ST6 as shown in FIG. Will be done.

  Next, a case where the SB winning data is not set in the RT state ST6 in a normal section will be described.

  At the timing of t8 in the second preparation state ST5, which is a situation of an advantageous section, as shown in FIG. However, even if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the number of trigger games, the game section is maintained in the advantageous section as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the second promotion replay prize is established at the timing t9 when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of opportunity games and less than the upper limit number of games. ), The gaming state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6. In this case, since the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of opportunity games, the gaming section is changed to the advantageous section at the timing of the t9 as shown in FIG. To normal section.

  Thereafter, in the state of the RT state ST6, which is a normal section, the SB winning data is not set, and the RT state ST6 ends at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. As shown, the process shifts to the first preparation state ST4. In this case, the first preparation state ST4 is a normal section. The first promotion replay winning data is set before the SB winning data is set. In this case, since the game section is the normal section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for establishing the first promotion replay winning is not notified. Accordingly, an event occurs in which the first promotion replay winning data is set at the timing of t11 but the first promotion replay winning is not established, and the gaming state is changed as shown in FIGS. 41 (f) and 41 (h). The state shifts from the first preparation state ST4 to the normal state ST1.

  As described above, when the transition to the RT state ST6 is made in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the number of trigger games and less than the upper limit number of games, the state is the RT state ST6 and a normal section. Then, when the SB winning data is set in the middle of the RT state ST6, the process shifts to the RT state ST6. At the time of the lottery process, the table for the RT state (FIG. 21D) is referred to, and the process shifts to the RT state ST6. Is satisfied, the 100% which is the maximum continuation rate is selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. Accordingly, the player expects to shift to the RT state ST6 in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of opportunity games, and also determines that the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6. Would expect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<About game history management>
Next, a management process executed by the main MPU 72 for managing the history of the game and notifying the management result will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The management process is executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  First, the value of the total game number counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is grasped (step S2001), and the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is grasped (step S2002). Then, the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b to the value of the total game number counter 74a is calculated (step S2003). That is, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = “the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b” / “the value of the total game number counter 74a”. Then, among the values obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100, the hundreds digit is displayed on the first notification display device 85, the tens digit is displayed on the second notification display device 86, and the ones digit is displayed on the first notification display device 86. Display control is performed on these first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 so as to be displayed on the third notification display device 87 without passing through another control device (step S2004). The calculation result is reported as a percentage display. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is "35", "0" is displayed on the first notification display device 85, and "3" is displayed on the second notification display device 86. On the third notification display device 87, “5” is displayed. Further, for example, if the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is “100”, “1” is displayed on the first notification display device 85, “0” is displayed on the second notification display device 86, “0” is displayed on the display device 87 for three notifications.

  By executing the management process as described above, the management result of the game history is always displayed on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87, and the manager of the game hall can use the front door 12. Is opened, and the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 are visually observed, so that the management result of the game history can be grasped. Further, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed in a cycle shorter than the shortest time required for the completion of one game, and more specifically, the shortest time required from the end of one game to the start of the next one game. It is executed in a cycle shorter than the period. Therefore, the administrator of the game hall can visually recognize the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 to grasp the management result of the game history up to the game completed immediately before.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart of an illumination process for executing illumination control of the illumination devices 88a and 88b provided for irradiating the main controller 70 with light when the front door 12 is opened. It will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the lighting process is executed in step S214 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

  If no light is emitted from the lighting devices 88a and 88b (step S2101: NO), it is determined whether or not the front door 12 is open based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 89. (Step S2102). If the front door 12 is open (step S2102: YES), it is determined whether the opening angle of the front door 12 is within a predetermined angle range (step S2103). Specifically, based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 89, it is determined whether or not the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined opening angle. The predetermined opening angle is set as 86% of the maximum opening angle of the front door 12. Specifically, since the state in which the front door 12 is opened at 90 ° to the housing 11 is the maximum opening angle of the front door 12, the state in which the front door 12 is opened about 77 ° to the housing 11 is predetermined. The opening angle is set. If a positive determination is made in step S2103, that is, if the front door 12 is not in the closed state and the opening angle of the front door 12 is 77 ° or less, a drive signal is output to the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b (step S2104). As a result, light is emitted from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b to the irradiation range IR including the main control device 70. This light irradiation state is continued until the processing of step S2106 described later is executed.

  When light is emitted from the lighting devices 88a and 88b (step S2101: YES), the front door 12 is closed or the front door 12 is closed based on the state of the signal input from the opening angle sensor 89. It is determined whether the opening angle exceeds a predetermined opening angle (step S2105). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2105, the output of the drive signal to the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is stopped (step S2106). Thereby, the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b enter the non-lighting state, and the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b toward the irradiation range IR is stopped.

  Here, the relationship between the opening angle of the front door 12 and the control state of the lighting devices 88a and 88b will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b). FIG. 44A shows a state of the front door 12, and FIG. 44B shows a control state of the lighting devices 88a and 88b. In the following description, FIG. 45A and FIG. 45B are appropriately referred to. FIG. 45 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state of the lighting devices 88a and 88b when the front door 12 is in an open state and the opening angle is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle. () Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state of the lighting devices 88a and 88b when the opening angle of the front door 12 is the maximum opening angle exceeding a predetermined opening angle.

  First, a case where the opening operation of the front door 12 is stopped in a situation where the opening angle of the front door 12 is equal to or less than a predetermined opening angle will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 44A, in a situation where the front door 12 is in the closed state, the opening operation of the front door 12 is started at timing t1. In this case, irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 88a and 88b is started at the timing of the time t1, as shown in FIG. Thereafter, the opening operation of the front door 12 is stopped in a state before the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds the predetermined opening angle at timing t2. In this state, light is emitted from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b to the main control device 70 as shown in FIG. As a result, even when the front door 12 is slightly opened, the main control device 70 is illuminated brightly. The display contents of the display devices 85 to 87 can be visually checked. In this case, since it is not necessary to open the front door 12 to the end at the time of the checking operation, the checking operation is facilitated.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44A, the closing operation of the front door 12 is started at the timing of t3, and the front door 12 is closed at the timing of t4. In this case, the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is stopped at the timing of the time t4, as shown in FIG.

  Next, a case where the opening operation of the front door 12 is performed until the opening angle of the front door 12 reaches the maximum opening angle will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 44A, in a situation where the front door 12 is in the closed state, the opening operation of the front door 12 is started at timing t5. In this case, the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is started at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined opening angle as shown in FIG. Thus, the irradiation of the light from the pair of illumination devices 88a and 88b is stopped at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, the opening operation of the front door 12 is stopped in a state where the opening angle of the front door 12 becomes the maximum opening angle at the timing of t7. In this state, as shown in FIG. 45B, irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b toward the main control device 70 is not performed. When the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined opening angle such as when the opening angle of the front door 12 becomes the maximum opening angle, the inside of the housing 11 is illuminated by the light of the in-store lighting of the game hall or sunlight. . In this case, if the main control device 70 is illuminated by the lighting devices 88a and 88b, the visibility of the main control device 70 and the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 may be reduced. Is done. On the other hand, when the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, the irradiation of light from the pair of lighting devices 88a and 88b is stopped, so that such a problem occurs. It is possible to do not.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44A, the closing operation of the front door 12 is started at the timing t8, and the opening angle of the front door 12 becomes equal to or smaller than the predetermined opening angle at the timing t9. In this case, irradiation of light from the pair of illumination devices 88a and 88b is started at the timing of the time t9, as shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44A, the front door 12 is closed at the timing of t10. In this case, the irradiation of the light from the pair of illumination devices 88a and 88b is stopped at the timing of the time t10, as shown in FIG.

  Since the lighting devices 88a and 88b for illuminating the main control device 70 are provided, it is easy to perform a check operation of the main control device 70 by opening the front door 12. In this case, when the front door 12 is closed, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are in a non-lighting state. Thus, it is possible to prevent the lighting devices 88a and 88b from being ineffectively illuminated in a situation where the main control device 70 is not checked. In addition, when the opening operation of the front door 12 is performed, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are naturally in the lighting state. Accordingly, since there is no need to separately perform an operation for bringing the lighting devices 88a and 88b into the lighting state, it is easy to perform the checking operation of the main control device 70.

  The lighting devices 88a and 88b are provided in the housing 11 in which the main control device 70 is provided. This makes it easier to illuminate the main control device 70 with the illumination devices 88a and 88b according to the opening operation of the front door 12.

  Irrespective of the open position of the front door 12, the lighting devices 88a and 88b do not enter an illuminated state, and the lighting devices 88a and 88b are selectively illuminated at some open positions. State. Thus, when the lighting devices 88a and 88b are set to the lighting state only in a preferable condition when the main control device 70 is checked, and when the lighting devices 88a and 88b are set to the lighting state, it is difficult to perform the checking of the main control device 70 instead. The lighting devices 88a and 88b can be set to a non-lighting state.

  When the front door 12 is at the maximum open position, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are in a non-lighting state. Thus, in a situation where the main control device 70 is sufficiently brightly illuminated by the illumination of the game hall, the illumination devices 88a and 88b are in a non-illuminated state, and the illumination of the main control device 70 is instead performed by the illumination by the illumination devices 88a and 88b. It is possible to prevent inconveniences such as making it difficult to confirm.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  The existence of a plurality of types of game states ST1 to ST6 and the existence of a plurality of types of game sections in addition to the states allow the progress of the game to be diversified. Further, the advantageous section is a section in which the transition to the RT state ST6 is more likely to occur than the normal section, and both the normal section and the advantageous section can stay in each of a plurality of types of gaming states ST1 to ST6. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting an advantageous gaming state and a situation of an advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  When the second promotion replay winning is established in the second preparation state ST5, the state shifts to the RT state ST6. It is not performed in the normal section but performed in the advantageous section. Therefore, in the RT state ST6, it is basically an advantageous section. However, a situation may occur in which the normal section is set in the RT state ST6 in relation to the number of games continued in the advantageous section. In this case, when the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and the normal section, the state shifts to the RT state ST6 and the advantageous section and the table for the RT state is referred to. A transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. Then, when the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the table for the RT state, the transfer to the RT state ST6 is definitely won and the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is 100%, which is the most advantageous rate. The continuation rate is selected. Thus, the player plays the game while expecting that a situation that is a normal section in the RT state ST6 will occur, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 in the normal section as described above, the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the table for the RT state, so that it is ensured. Then, the transition to the RT state ST6 is won, and the most advantageous 100% continuation rate as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is selected. In this case, if the second promotion replay winning is established and the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in a situation where the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of opportunity games, the game continues in the advantageous section. Even if the number of executed games has not reached the upper limit number of games, the RT state ST6 starts from the start of the RT state ST6 and the state is a normal section. As a result, it is possible to give a lot of opportunities to set the SB winning data in the RT state ST6 and the normal section.

  When the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the game section becomes an advantageous section, and when the first BB prize is established in the advantageous section, the game section is maintained in the advantageous section. That is, in the first BB state, the game section is basically an advantageous section. Then, in the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5 after the end of the first BB state, the advantageous section is maintained, and any one of these gaming states ST3 to ST5 is the advantageous section. Even if the SB winning data is set in, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not executed. On the other hand, when the number of games continued in the advantageous section in the middle of the first BB state reaches the upper limit game number, the state is the first BB state and the normal section, and also in the post-bonus state ST3. The normal section is maintained. If the number of games continued in the advantageous section during the post-bonus state ST3 reaches the upper limit game number, the state is the post-bonus state ST3 and the normal section. When the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 and a normal section, the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section and the RT state ST6 is referred to by referring to the tables for various states. Transfer lottery process is executed. When the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the various state tables, the transfer to the RT state ST6 is definitely won. This allows the player to play a game while expecting a situation that is a normal section in one of the first BB state and the post-bonus state ST3, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

  If the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first BB state and the advantageous section, the transition to the RT state ST6 may not be won. On the other hand, when the situation is the first BB state and the normal section is reached, after the end of the first BB state, the state is the post-bonus state ST3 and the normal section. Then, in order to shift the gaming state from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4, it is necessary to set the SB winning data. When the SB winning data is set, the gaming section shifts to the advantageous section. At the same time, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the various state tables, and the shift to the RT state ST6 is reliably won. Thereby, regardless of whether the state of the normal section or the state of the advantageous section is in the first BB state, the transition to the RT state ST6 can be won, while the state of the first BB state is the normal section. Can be improved.

  When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games, the initial state of the advantageous section is determined regardless of whether or not the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied and regardless of the current game states ST1 to ST6. The conversion process is executed, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied, and the game section becomes a normal section. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing excessively. On the other hand, it is unfortunate for a player who wishes to continue the advantageous section that the number of games continued in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games. On the other hand, if the second promotion replay winning is established in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of opportunity games, the RT state is ST6 and the situation is a normal section. Will be in a state where profits are easily given. Also, as described above, when the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the first BB state or the post-bonus state ST3, each of these gaming states is in a normal section, and the player has a profit. It will be in a state where it is easily applied. Thereby, even if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section approaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the degree of interest in the game from being reduced.

  When the SB winning data is set or the first BB prize is established in the normal section, not only is the advantageous section set, but also the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the SB winning data is set or the first BB winning is achieved in the normal section.

  The transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in a game in which the SB winning data is set or a game after the game in which the first BB prize has been established and which is included in the advantageous section. Thereby, the difference between the normal section and the advantageous section is such that the normal section is a section in which the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 is not executed, and the advantageous section is a section in which the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 can be executed. It can be clear.

  The transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in a mode corresponding to the current gaming state ST1 to ST6 in a game after the game in which the SB winning data is set and included in the advantageous section. Thus, the player pays attention not only to the SB winning data being set in the normal section but also to the types of the game states ST1 to ST6 in the subsequent advantageous sections.

  Since the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 and the SB winning is not established, the gaming state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4. That is, the gaming state at the time when the SB winning data is set in the normal section and the gaming state in the case where the transitional lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the advantageous section shifted based on the setting of the SB winning data. It can be different. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the combination of the setting mode of the game section and the transition mode of the game state.

  When the number of remaining games up to the normal-side upper limit game number in the normal state ST1 exceeds 50 games, the SB lottery data is set and the lottery process is shifted to the RT state ST6 based on the shift to the advantageous section. In this case, the transition to the RT state ST6 is not won by referring to the first table for the normal state. As a result, even if the SB winning data is set in the normal section and the section shifts to the advantageous section, it is possible to generate a situation in which the transition to the RT state ST6 does not result in the winning.

  When the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section occurs, a transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed in the first game of the advantageous section. This makes it possible to execute the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 early when the section is set to the advantageous section.

  The condition for terminating the advantageous section is different depending on the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6. For example, when the lottery process of transition to the RT state ST6 is executed in the normal state ST1, if the transition to the RT state ST6 is won, after the normal state ST1 is completed, it is advantageous to return to the state of transition to the normal state ST1 again or advantageously. The advantageous section is continued until the number of continued games in the section reaches the upper limit number of games. On the other hand, if the transition to RT state ST6 is not a winning, the transition lottery process in RT state ST6 is executed. Ends the advantageous section. Thereby, it is possible to associate the result of the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 with the continuation mode of the advantageous section.

  In the normal state ST1, the transitional lottery process to the RT state ST6 is performed by setting the zone as an advantageous section, and when the transition lottery process does not result in the transition to the RT state ST6, the game in which the transition lottery process is executed is executed. Ends the advantageous section. This makes it possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing unnecessarily long in a situation where the advantage of the advantageous section cannot be enjoyed because the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. Becomes

  In the post-bonus state ST3, the transition to the first preparation state ST4 occurs on condition that the SB winning data is set, and the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 in a normal section. , The transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed with reference to the various state tables, so that the transfer to the RT state ST6 is reliably won. That is, when the state is the normal section in the post-bonus state ST3, the probability that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied is increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the situation of the normal section in the post-bonus state ST3.

  When the second BB state is set in the normal section, after the end of the second BB state, the state is the post-bonus state ST3, which is a normal section. Thus, in the case of the second BB state, not only the profit of the BB state ST2 is given to the player, but also after the end of the second BB state, the state is the post-bonus state ST3, which is a normal section. Increases the probability that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the second BB state.

  If the first BB state is entered in the normal section, the advantageous section is set at the start of the first BB state. Therefore, after the end of the first BB state, the state is the post-bonus state ST3, which is an advantageous section. Then, even if the SB winning data is set in the situation of the advantageous section, the shift lottery process to the RT state ST6 is not executed. This makes it possible to make the player's advantage different after the end of the BB state ST2 between the first BB state and the second BB state.

  On the other hand, when the second section is in the second BB state in the normal section, the advantage section is not set, so that the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is not executed in the second section, whereas the first section is in the normal section. In this case, since the section is set to the advantageous section, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is performed in the first BB state. Thereby, even when the first BB state occurs, it is possible to provide an opportunity to execute the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6.

  There are a plurality of types of opportunities for ending the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner of ending the advantageous section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  When the number of remaining games up to the normal side upper limit game number in the normal state ST1 is 50 games or less, when the SB lottery data is set and the lottery process is shifted to the RT state ST6 based on the shift to the advantageous section. , The transition to the RT state ST6 is won by referring to the second table for the normal state. When the transition to the RT state ST6 is won in the normal state ST1 and the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, the process then proceeds to the first preparation state ST4 to enable the first promotion replay winning. Until the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified, the advantageous section is reliably continued. Thus, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending without executing the above-described stop order even if the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. .

  If the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" even in the advantageous section, the stop order and the second promotion of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the first promotion replay winning are achieved. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the replay winning is not notified. Thereby, it is possible to cause a situation in which the notification of the stop order as described above is not executed even in the advantageous section, and it is possible to appropriately control the game section.

  When the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 does not result in the transfer winning, the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" while maintaining the advantageous section. By maintaining the advantageous section in this manner, it is possible to prevent the execution of the lottery process transition to the RT state ST6 with respect to the subsequent setting of the SB winning data, and to execute the above-described advantageous section in the advantageous section. It is possible to prevent the notification of the stop order from being executed. As a result, when the transition to the RT state ST6 has not been won, it is possible to easily end the advantageous section without transition to the RT state ST6.

  When the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the state is the first BB state and an advantageous section. Then, when the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed for the setting of the advantageous section does not result in the transfer winning, “1” is set to the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74. In this advantageous section, the state in which the advantageous end preparation flag is set to “1” is maintained in the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5 after the end of the first BB state. Thereby, although the lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 has already been executed for the occurrence of the first BB state, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the post-bonus state ST after the first BB state is completed. In the second preparation state ST5, it is possible to prevent the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 from being executed again.

  If the transition to the first BB state occurs when the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1” in the advantageous section, the normal transition of the game section occurs even if the transition to the first BB state occurs. Since the transition from the section to the advantageous section does not occur, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 triggered by the transition to the first BB state is not executed. This makes it possible to cause a situation in which the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is not executed even if the transition to the first BB state occurs.

  When the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the state is the first BB state and an advantageous section. Then, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is performed based on the setting of the advantageous section. Thereby, when the first BB state occurs in the normal section, not only the profit in the BB state ST2 is provided to the player, but also the benefit of the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 is provided to the player. As a result, the player's attention to the occurrence of the first BB state can be increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  When the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the gaming section is set to the advantageous section at the start of the first BB state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the timing at which the first BB state is started.

  In the first BB state and the advantageous section, when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the BB state ST2, the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only at the start of the first BB state but also after the start.

  The transition to the RT state ST6 in the middle of the first BB state on condition that the transition to the RT state ST6, which has been executed when the first BB state is started, has not resulted in the transition to the RT state ST6 being won. A lottery process is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the satisfaction of the transition condition to the RT state ST6 from occurring repeatedly.

  If the transition to the RT state ST6 has been won in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed when the first BB state is started, the index value IV = 2 in the BB state ST2 in the first BB state. Alternatively, the continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed in response to the winning at 3. Thereby, even if the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied when the first BB state is started, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game in the first BB state.

  The game section is set to an advantageous section based on the SB winning data set in a situation where the gaming section is a normal section, and the gaming state is set to the first state based on the SB winning data set in the post-bonus state ST3. Move to the preparation state ST4. By sharing the transition condition of the game section and the transition condition of the game state as the setting of the SB winning data, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the setting of the SB winning data.

  When the SB winning data is set, the gaming section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section regardless of whether the SB winning is established or not, whereas the SB winning data is set and the SB winning is established. If not, the gaming state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4. Thus, a state where the normal zone is shifted to the advantageous section and a transition from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4 simultaneously, and a state where the normal section is shifted to the advantageous section but the post-bonus state ST3 is maintained. Can be generated, and the transition state of the combination of the game section and the game state can be diversified.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the player can select whether to delay the transition timing from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6. A configuration for enabling the delay of the transition timing will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a combination of the winning data and the point value PV set for each of the index values IV = 7 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5.

  As shown in FIG. 46, in the lottery table in the second preparation state ST5 in the present embodiment, only the normal replay winning data is set for the index value IV = 7 as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, in the index values IV = 8 to 13, not only the normal replay winning data and the second promotion replay winning data, but also other continuous replay winning data are set. The continuous replay winning data is winning data that enables a continuous replay winning to be achieved. When the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "replay" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, a continuous replay win is established. . When the continuous replay prize is established, a replay privilege is awarded. Also, in the second preparation state ST5, when a normal replay winning is achieved despite being won with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13, the gaming state is changed to the second preparation state as in the first embodiment. The process shifts from ST5 to the normal state ST1. However, if a continuous replay prize is established in a case where the player wins with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13, the second preparation state ST5 is continued.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the winning mode that is established when the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 8, as shown in FIG. 47, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. Regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second promotion replay winning is reliably established, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. In this case, the continuous replay win is reliably established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and otherwise, the normal replay win is established regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, when the index values IV = 9 to 13, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at which the second promotion replay winning is established is within the range of six stop orders. 8, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at which the continuous replay winning is established is different from the index value IV = 8 within the range of the six stop orders. As a result, even if the winning is performed with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 in the lottery process of the combination in the second preparation state ST5 (FIG. 13), the stop order corresponding to the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is obtained. Unless the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the second promotion replay winning is not established. Similarly, the stopping operations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are performed in the stopping order corresponding to the establishment of the continuous replay winning. Unless this is done, the continuous replay win will not be established.

  By the way, as a combination of the symbols that can establish the second promotion replay winning, a combination of a “replay” symbol, a “bell” symbol, a “replay” symbol, and a “bell” symbol, a “replay” symbol, a “bell” symbol In the configuration where is set, the combination of "Replay" symbol, "Bell" symbol, and "Bell" symbol is set as the symbol combination that enables the establishment of the continuous replay winning, and the index When the values IV = 8 and 9, both the second promotion replay winning and the continuous replay winning need to stop the left reel 32L first, and when the index values IV = 10 and 11, the second promotion replay winning And the continuous replay winning, it is necessary to first stop the middle reel 32M, and when the index values IV = 12 and 13, the second promotion Any of the winning and continues the replay winning it is also necessary to first stop the right reel 32R. As a result, in the second preparation state ST5, when one of the index values IV = 8 to 13 is won, one of the second promotion replay winning, the continuous replay winning, and the normal replay winning is surely established.

  FIG. 48 shows a state in which the game is in the second preparation state ST5, which is an advantageous section, and in which the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. In a situation where the number of games is equal to or greater than the small number of games and less than the number of trigger games, the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the index value IV = 10 is won. FIG. As shown in FIG. 48, a continuous game number image G4 for notifying the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is displayed on the upper edge side of the image display device 63. By confirming the continuous game number image G4, the player can grasp the number of games required until the number of games in the advantageous section is reached. Note that the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is displayed, and may be configured to display the number of remaining games until the number of trigger games is reached.

  On the center side of the image display device 63, a first stop order image G5 that enables establishment of the second promotion replay winning is displayed. As the first stop order image G5, the same number of individual images as the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed side by side, and an image indicating the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed on each individual image. Specifically, when the index value IV = 10 is won, the second promotion is performed when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. Since the replay winning is established, the images in the order corresponding to the replay winning are displayed as the first stop order image G5.

  On the lower edge side of the image display device 63, a second stop order image G6 that enables establishment of a continuous replay winning is displayed. As the second stop order image G6, the same number of individual images as the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed side by side, and an image indicating the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R is displayed on each individual image. Specifically, when the index value IV = 10 is won, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. Holds, the image in the order corresponding to that is displayed as the second stop order image G6.

  As described above, not only the first stop sequence image G5 but also the second stop sequence image G6 is displayed, and when the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the second preparation state ST5, the advantageous section In accordance with the number of continuous games, the player is to select whether to establish the second promotion replay winning and shift to the RT state ST6 or to establish the continuous replay winning and stay in the second preparation state ST5. Becomes possible. For example, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is close to the number of opportunity games, by arbitrarily establishing a continuous replay winning and delaying the transition to the RT state ST6, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the number of opportunity games. In such a situation, it is possible to shift to the RT state ST6. Then, when the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in a situation where the number of games is equal to or more than the opportunity game, the RT state ST6 progresses in the normal section, so that the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6. This not only ensures that the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, but also ensures that 100% is selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. On the other hand, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is far from the number of trigger games, it is possible to establish the second promotion replay winning and shift to the RT state ST6 early.

  Hereinafter, a description will be given of a processing configuration for enabling execution of the above-described notification. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the notification control processing executed by the main MPU 72.

  In steps S2201 to S2204, the same processes as those in steps S1101 to S1104 of the notification control process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment are executed. In the second preparation state ST5, when the winning is achieved with any of the index values IV = 8 to 13 (step S2205: YES), the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1” and the main RAM 74 is advantageously ended. It is determined whether the value of the preparation flag is “0” (step S2206). When an affirmative determination is made in step S2206, it is determined whether or not the situation is such that the number of continued games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of games 30 games smaller than the number of opportunity games and less than the number of opportunity games (step S2207). .

  If a negative determination is made in step S2207, the second display data setting process is executed (step S2208). In the setting processing of the second display data, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the second promotion replay winning based on the information of the winning combination this time among the index values IV = 8 to 13. The display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is controlled so that the display of the value corresponding to the above is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. The display on the dual-purpose display section 66 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the current game. Also, the second stop order command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2209). In the second stop order command, information for enabling the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second promotion replay winning in the current game is set.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, a third display data setting process is executed (step S2210). In the setting processing of the third display data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the second promotion replay winning based on the information of the winning combination in the index values IV = 8 to 13 is determined. The display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is controlled so that the display of the value corresponding to the combination of the stop sequence of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R enabling the establishment of the continuous replay winning is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66. The display on the dual-purpose display section 66 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the current game. In addition, a third stop order command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2211). The third stop order command includes a stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R enabling the establishment of the second promotion replay winning in this game and a stop of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R enabling the establishment of the continuous replay winning. Information is set so that the order can be specified by the production side MPU 92.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a notification process executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the notification process is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec).

  When the second stop order command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2301: YES), the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the second stop order command received this time is displayed on the image display device 63. The necessary data is set (step S2302). However, at this timing, the image in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current second stop order command is not displayed on the image display device 63. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in a measurement counter provided in the effect-side RAM 94 (step S2303). The notification delay period is set as a period shorter than the acceleration period from when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start to rotate to the constant speed, and is set to, for example, 0.5 msec. The value set in the measurement counter is decremented each time the notification process is started. Then, when the notification delay period has elapsed, the stop sequence of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the data set in step S2302 is displayed on the image display device 63. In this case, the stop sequence of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is displayed on the image display device 63.

  When the third stop order command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2304: YES), the image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the third stop order command received this time is displayed on the image display device 63. The necessary data is set (step S2305). However, at this timing, the image in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the current third stop order command is not displayed on the image display device 63. In step S2305, the data corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R enabling the establishment of the second promotion replay winning and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R enabling the establishment of the continuous replay winning are determined. Both the corresponding data are set. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set to a measurement counter provided in the production side RAM 94 (step S2306). The notification delay period is as described above. Then, when the notification delay period has elapsed, the stop sequence of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the data set in step S2305 is displayed on the image display device 63. In this case, both the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the second promotion replay winning and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the continuous replay winning are both determined by the image display device 63. (See FIG. 48).

  In step S2307 of the notification process, the process corresponding to the first stop order command and the processes of steps S1204 to S1205 of the notification process (FIG. 28) in the first embodiment are executed.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a second preparation state process executed by the main MPU 72.

  In steps S2401 to S2406, the same processing as steps S1001 to S1006 of the second preparation state processing (FIG. 26) in the first embodiment is executed. In the case where the second promotion replay winning data is set in this game and the second promotion replay winning is not achieved (step S2403: YES, step S2404: NO), it is determined whether or not the continuous replay winning is achieved. Is determined (step S2407). When the continuous replay prize has been established (step S2407: YES), the second preparation state processing ends. Thereby, the second preparation state ST5 is continued. When the continuous replay winning is not established (step S2407: NO), it means that the normal replay winning is established. In this case, the status counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2408). Thereby, the game state shifts from the second preparation state ST5 to the normal state ST1.

  According to the present embodiment described above, in the case where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the second preparation state ST5 and the number of games to be continued in the advantageous section is close to the number of trigger games, the advantage is obtained. Depending on the number of continuous games in the section, the player is made to select whether to establish the second promotion replay winning and shift to the RT state ST6 or to establish the continuous replay winning and stay in the second preparation state ST5. It becomes possible. For example, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is close to the number of opportunity games, by arbitrarily establishing a continuous replay winning and delaying the transition to the RT state ST6, the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the number of opportunity games. In such a situation, it is possible to shift to the RT state ST6. Then, when the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in a situation where the number of games is equal to or more than the opportunity game, the RT state ST6 progresses in the normal section, so that the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6. This not only ensures that the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied, but also ensures that 100% is selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. On the other hand, if the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is far from the number of trigger games, it is possible to establish the second promotion replay winning and shift to the RT state ST6 early. With the above configuration, it is possible for the player to predict an optimal timing as the timing for establishing the second promotion replay winning, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, even in the case where the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the second preparation state ST5, in a situation where the number of continued games in the advantageous section is not within the range of the predetermined number of games which is a situation close to the number of trigger games, The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is notified, but the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the continuous replay winning is not notified. Thereby, it is possible to limit the period during which the stay in the second preparation state ST5 can be intentionally performed, and to prevent the stay in the second preparation state ST5 from being excessively performed. Becomes

  In the second preparation state ST5, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the second promotion replay winning is notified, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32 that enable the establishment of the continuous replay winning are notified. The stop order of 32R may be always notified. In this case, it is possible to secure a long period for the player to select.

<Third embodiment>
In this embodiment, a plurality of types of SB winning data are set. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram for describing a lottery table for a normal state in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 52, index values IV of “1” to “8” are set in the lottery table for the normal state. The winning data set with index values IV = 1 to 6 is the same as in the first embodiment, and in this case, the first SB winning data is set with index value IV = 6. The first SB winning data is the same as the SB winning data in the first embodiment, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the establishment of the first SB winning is the same as the combination of the symbols corresponding to the establishment of the SB winning in the first embodiment. Are identical. The second SB winning data is set to the index value IV = 7, and the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 8. The point value PV set to the index value IV = 6 is “3000”, whereas the point value PV set to the index value IV = 7 is “1000”. Therefore, the probability that the second SB winning data is set is lower than the probability that the first SB winning data is set. In addition, the probability that the first SB winning data is set and the probability that the second SB winning data is set are the same between the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  The relationship between the index value IV and the winning data is the same in the post-bonus state ST3 and the RT state ST6. In the first preparation state ST4, the normal replay winning data and the first promotion replay winning data are set to index values IV = 9 to 14, and in the second preparation state ST5, the index values IV = 9 to 14. Normal replay winning data and second promotion replay winning data are set.

  The combination of symbols that enable the establishment of the second SB winning is such that the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a "LUCKY" symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a symbol. It is a "red 7" symbol. When the second SB winning data is set, it is possible to establish the second SB winning regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, but the stop buttons 42 to 44 for the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The second SB winning may not be established depending on the stop operation timing.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the transition trigger processing of the RT state ST6 executed by the main MPU 72.

  First, it is determined whether or not the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1”, thereby determining whether or not the game is the first game to be started after the shift to the advantageous section has occurred ( Step S2501). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, after clearing the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S2502), it is determined whether or not information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main RAM 74. A determination is made (step S2503). If a negative determination is made in step S2503, and the transition to the current advantageous section is triggered by the setting of the first SB winning data (step S2504: YES), a table group corresponding to the first SB winning data Is read (step S2505), and if the transition to the current advantageous section is triggered by the setting of the second SB winning data (step S2506: YES), the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data is read (step S2506: YES). In step S2507), if the shift to the advantageous section this time is triggered by the establishment of the first BB prize (step S2506: NO), the table corresponding to the first BB prize is read (step S2508).

  The table group corresponding to the first SB winning data is the table group shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (d) in the first embodiment, and the table corresponding to the first BB prize is the one in the first embodiment. 22 is a table shown in FIG. FIGS. 54A to 54D are explanatory diagrams for explaining a table group corresponding to the second SB winning data. As shown in FIG. 21D and FIG. 54D, the table for the RT state is the same as the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data and the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data. Accordingly, in the RT state ST6 and the normal section, regardless of which of the first SB winning data and the second SB winning data is set, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is reliably satisfied and the largest continuation is performed. A rate of 100% is reliably selected.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 (b) to 21 (c) and FIGS. 54 (b) to 54 (c), the second table for the normal state and the tables for various states are tables corresponding to the first SB winning data. Although the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is definitely satisfied in any of the group and the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data, the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is higher in the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data. This is more advantageous for the player than the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data. Further, as shown in FIGS. 21A and 54A, the first table for the normal state has a configuration in which the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied in the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data. On the other hand, in the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 may be satisfied. Therefore, the table group corresponding to the second SB winning data is more advantageous to the player than the table group corresponding to the first SB winning data. That is, when the second SB winning data with a relatively low winning probability in the lottery process of the combination (FIG. 13) is set, the first SB winning data with a relatively high winning probability in the lottery process of the role (FIG. 13) is set. The advantage in the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is higher than in the case where it is set.

  Returning to the description of the RT state transition trigger processing (FIG. 53), after executing any one of steps S2505, S2507, and S2508, a transition lottery process to RT state ST6 is executed (step S2509). In the shift lottery process, if the current execution trigger is the setting of the first SB winning data, the lottery process is executed with reference to the table corresponding to the current gaming state in the table group read out in step S2505, If the current execution trigger is the setting of the second SB winning data, the lottery process is executed with reference to the table corresponding to the current game state in the table group read out in step S2507, and the current execution trigger is the first trigger. If it is a 1BB winning, the lottery process is executed with reference to the table read in step S2508.

  When the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is a departure result (step S2510: NO), “1” is set to the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2511). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. If the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is a winning result (step S2510: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2512). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. In addition, a continuation rate storage process is executed (step S2513). In the processing of storing the continuation rate, the main RAM 74 stores information of the continuation rate selected when the winning result is obtained in the lottery processing for transition to the RT state ST6.

  According to the above configuration, the first SB winning data and the second SB winning data are set as the SB winning data that triggers the shift to the advantageous section. Then, the advantage of the shift lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed in the first game shifted to the advantageous section is determined by the advantageous section shifted to when the first SB winning data is set and the second SB winning data. Is different from the advantageous section to which the transition has been made when the is set. Thus, the player not only expects the SB winning data to be set, but also expects the SB winning data that is advantageous to the player to be set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which two types of first SB winning data and the second SB winning data are set as the SB winning data that triggers the shift to the advantageous section, and a configuration in which three or more types are set. Good. In this case, the configuration may be such that each of the SB winning data set in three or more types triggers the transition to the advantageous section and the advantage in the subsequent lottery processing to the RT state ST6 is different.

<Fourth embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the condition for transition to the normal section, which is the RT state ST6, in relation to the number of continuous games in the advantageous section. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section end process executed by the main MPU 72. In steps S2601 to S2607, the same processes as those in steps S1901 to S1907 of the process for ending the advantageous section (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are executed. In step S2608, the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is incremented by one. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the second promotion replay winning has been achieved (step S2609). When the second promotion replay winning is not established (step S2609: NO), the initial condition of the advantageous section is set on condition that the value of the continuous game number counter is equal to or more than the value corresponding to the upper limit game number (step S2610: YES). In addition to the conversion process (step S2611), the light-off process of the advantageous section display unit 67 is performed (step S2612).

  If the second promotion replay winning has been established (step S2609: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous game number counter falls into any of the first to fifth trigger ranges (step S2613). Each of the first to fifth opportunity ranges is set as a range of a plurality of consecutive games within the range of the upper limit game number of the advantageous section, and a plurality of games are provided between each of the first to fifth opportunity ranges. The game interval of the game is set. Specifically, the first opportunity range corresponds to 250 to 300 games of the number of continued games in the advantageous section, and the second opportunity range corresponds to 500 to 550 games of the number of continued games in the advantageous section. The opportunity range corresponds to 750 to 800 games of the number of continued games in the advantageous section, the fourth opportunity range corresponds to 1000 to 1,050 games of the number of continued games in the advantageous section, and the fifth opportunity range corresponds to the number of games of the advantageous section. It corresponds to 1250 to 1300 games of the number of continuous games.

  If the value of the continuous game number counter falls within any of the first to fifth trigger ranges (step S2613: YES), the advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S2611), and the advantageous section display section 67 is executed. Is executed (step S2612). Thereby, if the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section falls within any of the first to fifth trigger ranges, the state is the RT state ST6 and the normal section. Situation. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of a situation that is a normal section in the RT state ST6, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a situation where the game section is an advantageous section.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the manner of executing the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the transition trigger processing of the RT state ST6 executed by the main MPU 72. First, it is determined whether or not the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1”, thereby determining whether or not the game is the first game to be started after the shift to the advantageous section has occurred ( Step S2701). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, the advantageous start flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2702), and then it is determined whether or not information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main RAM 74. A determination is made (step S2703). If a negative determination is made in step S2703, a table corresponding to the winning combination in the current game is read (step S2704). Then, a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed (step S2705). In the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6, information of the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read information is collated with the table read in step S2704.

  If the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is a result of departure (step S2706: NO), “1” is set to the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2707). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. If the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is a winning result (step S2706: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2708). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. In addition, a continuation rate storage process is executed (step S2709). In the processing of storing the continuation rate, the main RAM 74 stores information of the continuation rate selected when the winning result is obtained in the lottery processing for transition to the RT state ST6.

  That is, in the present embodiment, when performing the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6, instead of using the table corresponding to the game state at the timing of executing the transfer lottery process, the game in which the transfer lottery process is performed is not used. A table corresponding to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 13) is used. In this table, the lower the winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13), the higher the probability of transition to the RT state ST6 in the corresponding table is set, and the higher the winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 13). Is set such that a higher continuation rate is easily selected as a continuation rate of the RT state ST6 in a table corresponding to a winning combination having a lower winning probability. As a result, the player pays attention to the result of the lottery process of the winning combination (FIG. 13) in the first game after the transition to the advantageous section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed using a table corresponding to a combination of the game state and the role lottery process (FIG. 13) in the first game after the transition to the advantageous section. . In this case, the execution mode of the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 can be made more complicated, and the transfer lottery process can be prevented from becoming uniform.

  In the above-described embodiment, a table corresponding to a winning combination having different winning probabilities among the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is also set as a table referred to in the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6. However, instead of this, the transfer lottery process may not be executed even in the first game after the transition to the advantageous section if the winning combination is won. When the winning combination is won in the first game, the execution of the shift lottery process is delayed, and thereafter, in a game in which the winning probability is won between the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, the corresponding winning combination is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is performed using a table corresponding to the winning combination. In this case, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the settings in the probability that the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

  Also, the type of replay winning data that is easy to be set in the lottery process (FIG. 13) for each of the gaming states ST1, ST3 to ST6 is made different to correspond to the type of replay winning data set in the game that has shifted to the advantageous section. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a lottery process for transitioning to the RT state ST6 is executed using a table to be executed. For example, in any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6, the first to fifth replay winning data can be set. Replay winning data is easily set, in the post-bonus state ST3, the second replay winning data is easily set, in the first preparation state ST4, third replay winning data is easily set, and in the second preparation state ST5, the fourth replay winning data is set. Replay winning data is easily set, and in the RT state ST6, the fifth replay winning data is easily set. Then, the lottery table is set such that the greater the value of n in the n-th replay winning data, the easier it is for the transition winning to be performed in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6. Thereby, while changing the probability of the transfer winning in the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 according to the gaming state, the table is relatively low in the probability of the transfer winning in any of the gaming states. It is possible for any of the relatively high tables to be selected.

<Sixth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the manner of executing the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a control process of a game section executed by the main MPU 72.

  In step S2801 of the control process of the game section, the same processing as that of steps S1401 to S1408 of the control process of the game section (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment is executed. In the game section control processing, if the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the section is an advantageous section (step S2802: YES), the processing of steps S2812 and S2813 is executed. The processing contents of these steps S2812 and S2813 are the same as steps S1416 and S1417 in the game section control processing (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment.

  If it is a normal section (step S2802: NO), and if the SB winning data is set in this game (step S2803: YES), “1” is set in both the advantageous section flag and the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74. Is set (step S2804), and the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2805). In addition, a lighting process for turning on the advantageous section display unit 67 is performed (step S2806).

  Thereafter, a shift lottery process at the time of winning is executed (step S2807). In the transfer lottery process at the time of winning, the common table is read from the main ROM 73, the information of the lottery counter regularly updated in the main RAM 74 is read, and the read information of the lottery counter is collated with the common table. . The common table is common irrespective of the current game state and the current set value, and specifically, is set so that the transition to the RT state ST6 is won with a probability of 10%.

  If the transition to the RT state ST6 has been won in the transition lottery process at the time of winning (step S2808: YES), the advantageous end preparation flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2809). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied. Further, a continuation rate storage process is executed (step S2810). In the storage process, the main RAM 74 stores information of 50%, which is the lowest stage continuation ratio. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a winning result is obtained in the transfer lottery process at the time of winning, the continuation rate to be set may be selected from the continuation rates of six stages.

  In step S2811, the same processing as steps S1413 to S1415 of the control processing of the game section (FIG. 31) in the first embodiment is executed.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the transition trigger processing of the RT state ST6 executed by the main MPU 72.

  First, it is determined whether or not the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1”, thereby determining whether or not the game is the first game to be started after the shift to the advantageous section has occurred ( Step S2901). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, after clearing the advantageous start flag of the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S2902), it is determined whether or not information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main RAM 74. A determination is made (step S2903). When a negative determination is made in step S2903, a lottery process for transition to the RT state ST6 is executed (step S2904). In the shift lottery process, the lottery is executed using the table corresponding to the current game state, as in step S1504 of the shift trigger process (FIG. 32) of the RT state ST6 in the first embodiment. Then, when the result of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is a deviation result (step S2905: NO), "1" is set to the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 (step S2906), and the process proceeds to the RT state ST6. If the result of the transfer lottery process is winning (step S2905: YES), the value of the advantageous end preparation flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2907). As a result, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the advantageous section. In addition, a continuation rate storage process is executed (step S2908). In the processing of storing the continuation rate, the main RAM 74 stores information of the continuation rate selected when the winning result is obtained in the lottery processing for transition to the RT state ST6.

  If it is determined in step S2903 that the information on the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 is set in the main RAM 74, the continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed (step S2909). In the promotion lottery process, the promotion lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state is read. The promotion lottery table is set so that the probability of a winning result in the promotion lottery process differs depending on the gaming state. Then, the information of the lottery counter, which is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, is read, and the read information is collated with the promotion lottery table corresponding to the current gaming state. If the promotion has been won (step S2910: YES), the continuation rate is updated (step S2911). In the update processing of the continuation rate, the continuation rate information stored in the main RAM 74 is updated so that the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 becomes a continuation rate one step higher. If the maximum continuation rate has already been reached, the continuation rate promotion lottery process (step S2909) is not executed.

  According to the above configuration, the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is executed not only for the game started first after shifting to the advantageous section, but also for the game in which the SB winning data that triggers the shift to the advantageous section is set. Is done. Thereby, the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed a plurality of times in response to the transition to the advantageous section, and the frequency of the transition condition to the RT state ST6 can be increased.

  In the transfer lottery process at the time of winning, which is executed in the game in which the SB winning data is set as a trigger for shifting to the advantageous section, a common table that is common regardless of the current game state and the current set value is used. The lottery is executed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration of the transfer lottery process at the time of winning.

  Further, in the case of a transition to the RT state ST6 in the transition lottery process at the time of the winning, in the game which is started first after the transition to the advantageous section, the continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed. As a result, if the transition to the RT state ST6 is won in the transfer lottery process at the time of winning, an opportunity to further promote the continuation rate of the RT state ST6 occurs, and the winning is performed in the transfer lottery process at the time of winning. It is possible to increase the player's expectation of the result.

  In the transfer lottery process at the time of winning, the lottery for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied may be executed using a table corresponding to the gaming states ST1 to ST6 at that time. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which various tables are set so that the probability of transition to the RT state ST6 winning differs depending on the game states ST1 to ST6. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the gaming states ST1 to ST6 at the time when the SB winning data is set.

  Further, when the transition to the RT state ST6 is won in the transition lottery processing at the time of winning, the promotion lottery processing of the continuation rate is performed in the transition trigger processing of the RT state ST6 executed after being set in the advantageous section. Instead of the configuration to be executed, the continuation rate promotion lottery process may not be executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the advantage with respect to the setting of the SB winning data from becoming extremely high.

  Also, when the first BB prize is established in the normal section, the shift lottery process at the time of winning is executed at that time, and when the situation is the first BB state and the situation is the advantageous section, the RT state ST6 is entered. The transfer lottery process or the continuation rate promotion lottery process may be executed. Thereby, it is possible to increase the advantage of the occurrence of the first BB state.

  In addition, one of a case where an advantageous section is set based on the setting of the SB winning data and a case where an advantageous section is set based on the establishment of the first BB prize, is a shift lottery at the time of winning. The transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 or the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate is performed based on not only the process but also the advantageous section being set thereafter, while the transfer lottery process at the time of winning is not performed. The configuration may be such that the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 or the continuation rate promotion lottery process is executed based on the setting of the advantageous section. On the one hand, not only the transfer lottery processing at the time of winning but also the transfer lottery processing to the RT state ST6 or the promotion lottery processing of the continuation rate is executed based on the fact that the advantageous section has been set, and the other , The transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 and the continuation rate promotion lottery process based on the setting of the advantageous section may be executed. As a result, when the advantageous section is set based on the setting of the SB winning data, and when the advantageous section is set based on the establishment of the first BB prize, the degree of advantage regarding the transition to the RT state ST6. Can be given a difference.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the condition for forcibly terminating the advantageous section in relation to the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is different from that in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section end process executed by the main MPU 72. In steps S3001 to S3007, the same processes as those in steps S1901 to S1907 of the process of ending the advantageous section (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are executed. In step S3008, the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is incremented by one. Thereafter, on condition that the value of the continuous game number counter is equal to or more than the value corresponding to the upper limit game number (step S3009: YES), the advantageous section initialization processing is executed (step S3010), and the advantageous section display section 67. (Step S3011).

  That is, in the present embodiment, the condition for forcibly terminating the advantageous section in relation to the number of continued games in the advantageous section is set only to the condition that the number of continued games in the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games. Even if the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs in a situation where the number of continuous games in the advantageous section has reached the number of trigger games, the advantageous section is not ended. Therefore, in order to generate a situation in the RT state ST6, which is a normal section, it is necessary to cause an event that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number in the middle of the RT state ST6. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of a situation that is a normal section in the RT state ST6. Then, when the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 in the normal section, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is reliably satisfied and the RT state ST6 is set, similarly to the first embodiment. The continuation rate is the maximum continuation rate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the profit is provided, and to enhance the satisfaction of the player when the profit is provided.

  Also, when the number of continued games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number in the middle of the RT state ST6, the one that reaches the upper limit game number early after the start of the RT state ST6 is the RT state ST6. It is possible to secure a large number of games to be executed in a sectional situation. This makes it possible to change the degree of advantage relating to the situation of being in the normal state in the RT state ST6 according to the timing at which the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games.

<Eighth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the ART state is set as the advantageous game state instead of the RT state ST6. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the first embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be awarded and a privilege to be awarded when a winning is achieved.

  As in the first embodiment, there are bell prize, watermelon prize, cherry prize, normal replay prize, first promotion replay prize, second promotion replay prize, first BB prize, second BB prize and SB prize as in the first embodiment. are doing. The correspondence between these winning modes and combinations of symbols is the same as in the first embodiment. In addition, in the present embodiment, a first compensation prize, a second compensation prize, and a third compensation prize exist separately from these winning modes. On the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is either a “BAR” symbol or a “white 7” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is “ In the case of a "bell" symbol, the first prize is awarded. Further, on the main line ML, the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is one of a “watermelon” symbol and a “LUCKY” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is In the case of the “bell” symbol, a second supplementary prize is won. On the main line ML, when the stop symbol of the left reel 32L is a “replay” symbol, the stop symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “bell” symbol, and the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is a “bell” symbol, It is the third supplementary prize. When any of the first compensation prize to the third compensation prize is achieved, the number of game media to be provided becomes “1”. This number to be awarded is smaller than the maximum bet number (specifically, “3”) required to start one game. The number of game media to be awarded when a bell prize is generated is “11”, and the number of awarded game media is greater than the maximum bet number required to start one game (specifically, “3”). This is a large number.

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the normal state in the present embodiment. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the established winning mode when the lottery table for the normal state is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 61, index values IV of “1” to “9” are set in the lottery table for the normal state. The winning data set with index values IV = 4 to 9 are the same as the winning data set with index values IV = 2 to 7 in the lottery table for the normal state in the first embodiment. On the other hand, for the index values IV = 1 to 3, any of the bell winning data and the first to third supplementary winning data is set.

  Specifically, the bell winning data and the first supplementary winning data are set for the index value IV = 1. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 1, as shown in FIG. 62, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the types and the types of the second and third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R are set. Bell winning is reliably generated regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and otherwise, the first compensation winning is reliably generated.

  At the index value IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 61, bell winning data and second supplementary winning data are set. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 2, as shown in FIG. 62, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types and the types of the second and third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R are set. Bell winning is reliably established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and otherwise, the second supplement winning is established reliably.

  At the index value IV = 3, bell winning data and third supplementation winning data are set as shown in FIG. When the winning is achieved with the index value IV = 3, as shown in FIG. 62, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types and the types of the second and third stop target reels 32L, 32M, 32R are set. Bell winning is reliably established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the third supplement winning is established reliably.

  The point values PV set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 3 are all “13000”, and the odds of winning in the lottery process of the combination (FIG. 13) are the same. . Further, the point value PV set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is the same regardless of any of the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”.

  FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (e) are explanatory diagrams for explaining winning data set to an index value IV = 9 or more in each of the game states ST1 and ST3 to ST6 other than the BB state ST2. The content of the winning data set to the index values IV = 1 to 8 and the point value PV set to the index values IV = 1 to 8 are the same in each of the game states ST1, ST3 to ST6 other than the BB state ST2. It is. Further, the lottery table in the BB state ST2 is the same as that in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 63 (a), 63 (b) and 63 (e), in the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3 and the RT state ST6, “9” is the maximum index value IV. , Index value IV = 9, only the normal replay winning data is set.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (c), in the first preparation state ST4, only the normal replay winning data is set to the index value IV = 9, and the normal replay winning data and the first promotion replay winning are set to the index values IV = 10 to 15. Combination with data is set. The relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the index values IV = 10 to 15 and the winning mode achieved is the same as the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the first preparation state ST4 in the first embodiment. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 63 (d), in the second preparation state ST5, only the normal replay winning data is set at the index value IV = 9, and the normal replay winning data and the second promotion replay winning are set at the index value IV = 10 to 15. Combination with data is set. The relationship between the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the index values IV = 10 to 15 and the winning mode that is established is the same as the index value IV = 8 to 13 in the second preparation state ST5 in the first embodiment. It is.

  The probability of the replay winning including the normal replay winning, the first promotion replay winning, and the second promotion replay winning being established is determined in the normal state ST1 <the post-bonus state ST3 = the first preparation state ST4 <the second preparation state ST5 <the RT state ST6. It has a relationship. Therefore, even in this embodiment, among the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6, the RT state ST6 is the gaming state with the highest advantage. The normal state ST1 is the gaming state with the lowest degree of advantage.

  The mode of transition between the game states ST1 to ST6 is the same as in the first embodiment. That is, when the first BB prize is established in any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6, the state shifts to the first BB state and the second BB prize is established. When the condition is established, the state shifts to the second BB state. When the first BB state or the second BB state is completed, the state shifts to the post-bonus state ST3. If the SB winning data is set in the post-bonus state ST3 but the SB prize is not established, the first preparation state is set. The process proceeds to ST4, and if the first promotion replay winning is achieved in the first preparation state ST4, the process proceeds to the second preparation state ST5. If the second promotion replay winning is achieved in the second preparation state ST5, the RT state is present. The process proceeds to ST6. The conditions for shifting to the advantageous section and the conditions for executing the shift lottery process to the RT state ST6 are also the same as those in the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, in the gaming state ST1, ST3 to ST6 other than the BB state ST2, and in a situation where the section is an advantageous section, regardless of whether the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1” or not. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the bell prize when the index value IV = 1 to 3 is won by the image display device 63 and the dual-purpose display unit 66, and the BB state. In the game state other than ST2, ST1, ST3 to ST6, and in the normal section, even if the player wins one of the index values IV = 1 to 3, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which can establish the bell prize can be established. The stop order is not announced. As described above, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the bell prize to be established in the advantageous section is notified, so that the advantage that the gaming section becomes the advantageous section can be increased.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the notification control processing executed by the main MPU 72.

  In the non-BB state (any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT state ST6), when one of the index values IV = 1 to 3 is won. (Step S3101: YES), the bell display data setting processing is performed on condition that the advantageous section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1” and the current game section is an advantageous section (step S3102: YES). Is executed (step S3103). The bell display data setting process corresponds to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the bell prize based on the information of the winning combination in the index values IV = 1 to 3. The display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is controlled so that the display of the value is started by the dual-purpose display unit 66. The display on the dual-purpose display section 66 is continued until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the current game.

  After that, a bell stop order command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S3104). The bell stop order command is set with information for enabling the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the winning of the bell in the current game. When the production side MPU 92 receives the bell stop order command, in the current game, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R which enable establishment of the bell prize at a timing before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R become possible. The notification of the stop order is started by the image display device 63.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the notified flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3105). The notification completion flag is a flag for specifying, by the main MPU 72, that the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the bell prize in the case of shifting to the advantageous section is performed once or more. It is.

  In steps S3106 to S3113 in the notification control process, the same processes as those in steps S1101 to S1108 of the notification control process (FIG. 27) in the first embodiment are executed.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section end process executed by the main MPU 72.

  First, it is determined whether or not a condition for shifting to the normal state ST1 has been satisfied in the current game (step S3201). This processing is the same as step S1901 of the advantageous section end processing (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. If the condition for shifting to the normal state ST1 is satisfied (step S3201: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the notified flag of the main RAM 74, so that the bell in the present advantageous section is determined. It is determined whether or not the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the winning has been generated at least once (step S3202). If “1” is set in the notified flag (step S3202: YES), the advantageous section initialization processing is executed in the same manner as step S1902 of the advantageous section end processing (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. (Step S3203). Thereby, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section. Thereafter, a light-off process for turning off the advantageous section display unit 67 is performed (step S3204).

  On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the notified flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3202: NO), the delay flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set without executing the advantageous section initialization processing. “1” is set (step S3205). The delay flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section is being delayed, and in a situation where the delay flag is set to “1”, the bell prize is won. When the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be established is executed, and the notification completion flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section.

  In the advantageous section end processing, when the current gaming state is the normal state ST1 and the advantageous end preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to “1” (step S3206 and step S3207: YES), the main RAM 74 It is determined whether or not “1” is set in the notification completion flag (step S3208). When “1” is set to the notified flag (step S3208: YES), similar to steps S3203 and S3204, the advantageous section initialization processing is executed (step S3209), and the advantageous section display section 67 is displayed. A light-off process for turning off the light is performed (step S3210). If “1” has not been set in the notified flag (step S3208: NO), “1” is set in the delay flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3211).

  If a negative determination is made in either step S3206 or step S3207, the value of the continuous game number counter of the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S3212). Then, on condition that the value of the continuous game number counter is equal to or more than the value corresponding to the upper limit game number (step S3213: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the notified flag of the main RAM 74. (Step S3214). When “1” is set to the notified flag (step S3214: YES), similar to steps S3203 and S3204, the advantageous section initialization processing is executed (step S3215), and the advantageous section display section 67 is displayed. A light-off process for turning off the light is performed (step S3216). If “1” has not been set in the notified flag (step S3214: NO), “1” is set in the delay flag of the main RAM 74 (step S3217).

  If a negative determination is made in step S3213, it is determined whether “1” is set in each of the notified flag and the delay flag in the main RAM 74 (step S3218). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3218, similar to steps S3203 and S3204, an advantageous section initialization process is executed (step S3219), and a turn-off process for turning off the advantageous section display unit 67 is executed. (Step S3220). In the initialization process of the advantageous section in each of step S3203, step S3209, step S3215, and step S3219, the notified flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" and the delay flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". I do.

  According to the above configuration, in the case of transition to the advantageous section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the bell winning at least once in the non-BB state is notified. Then, the number of game media provided when the bell prize is established is a number larger than the number of bets required to start one game (specifically, “3”). Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage of shifting to the advantageous section, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to shifting to the advantageous section.

  Even if the gaming state shifts to the normal state ST1, if the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the bell prize has not yet been notified after the shift to the advantageous section, the advantage is also provided in the normal state ST1. When the section is maintained and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the bell prize is notified, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section. Thereby, the game section does not uniquely become the normal section when the game state transitions to the normal state ST1, but sometimes the game section becomes the normal section when the game state transitions to the normal state ST1. In some cases, a normal section may be established by notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable winning to be established. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the game section changes from the advantageous section to the normal section.

  In the normal state ST1, when the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, the reel 32L enables the establishment of the bell prize in the advantageous section instead of immediately returning to the normal section when one game is completed in the advantageous section. , 32M, 32R are returned to the normal section when the stop order is notified. Thereby, when the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section in the normal state ST1, the timing of returning to the normal section can be diversified.

  The number of times of notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of a bell prize necessary for ending the advantageous section is set to one. This makes it possible to reduce the number of games staying in the advantageous section when the transition to the advantageous section has been made in the normal state ST1 but the transition condition to the RT state ST6 has not been satisfied.

  In the RT state ST6, which is an advantageous section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the bell prize to be established is notified, and the probability of the replay prize being established increases, whereas the RT state is increased. In ST6, which is a normal section, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the bell prize to be established is not notified, but the probability of the replay prize being established increases. Thereby, even in the RT state ST6, it is possible to set a plurality of advantages.

  It should be noted that the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the bell prize is executed once, and the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the advantageous section can be ended. It may be configured such that the notification of the order needs to be notified a plurality of times or more, such as twice or three times.

  In addition, after the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the bell prize has been executed the number of times that can be ended, an end lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to end the advantageous section. If the end lottery process results in a non-continuation, the advantageous section may end and shift to the normal section. The trigger for executing the end lottery process is arbitrary. For example, when the number of times that the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed becomes the number of times that can be ended, the end lottery is performed in each game. The processing may be executed, or the end lottery processing may be executed when a predetermined lottery opportunity is won or when a predetermined lottery opportunity winning is achieved.

  In addition to the bell prize, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is a predetermined stop order, a winning is established and the winning data is set when the winning is established and the game medium is given. It may be configured. In this case, in order to end the advantageous section, the winning with the largest number of awarded game media among a plurality of types of winnings that is established when the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes a predetermined stopping order ends. It may be configured to be established more than the number of times to be a trigger, and among the plural types of winnings established when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes a predetermined stop order, the number of game media provided is the smallest. A configuration may be required in which the number of winnings must be equal to or greater than the number of times when the winning is completed.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the following different configurations may be individually applied to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following embodiments may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are mutually combined. Good.

  (1) The game section is not limited to a configuration in which a normal section in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is notified and an advantageous section in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be notified are set. In any case, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be notified, but a plurality of sections in which the types of winning data to be notified of the stop order are different may be set. , 32M, and 32R may be notified, but a plurality of sections having different frequencies at which the notification of the stop order is executed may be set. Even in this case, by giving a difference in the advantage regarding the notification of the stop order in a plurality of sections, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the transition of the game section.

  (2) When SB winning data is set in a state where the RT state ST6 is a normal section and the SB winning data is set, it is not limited to a configuration in which a 100% continuation rate is reliably selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. No continuation rate other than 100% is selected or the continuation rate of 100% is not selected, but the continuation rate is selected in a manner more advantageous than when the lottery process is shifted to the RT state ST6 in other situations. A high configuration may be used. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the setting of the SB winning data in the RT state ST6 and the normal section.

  (3) Transition to RT state ST6 executed when SB winning data is set in the state of RT state ST6 and a normal section The lottery process is shifted to RT state ST6 executed in other situations. The configuration is not limited to the configuration having a higher degree of advantage than the transfer lottery process of the above, and may be the same or substantially the same as the advantage of the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed in another predetermined situation. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the advantage is lower than the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 executed in other situations. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which even if the SB lottery process is performed when the SB winning data is set in the RT state ST6 and in the normal section, the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 does not result in the transfer winning. .

  (4) When the RT state ST6 is reached and the situation is a normal section, the provision of the profit to the player may be determined at that time. For example, if the RT state ST6 and the situation is a normal section, even if SB winning data is not set in the situation, the SB in the other game states ST1, ST3 to ST5 after the end of the RT state ST6. The transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed with respect to the first setting of the winning data may be configured so that the transfer winning is surely performed. In addition to the sure transfer winning, the RT state ST6 having the highest advantage is provided. May be selected. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of being in the RT state ST6 and being in a normal section.

  (5) The trigger for shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is not limited to the configuration in which the SB winning data is set or the first BB winning is established. For example, the SB winning data is set. In addition, the fact that the SB winning is not established may be an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section. In this case, the trigger for shifting the gaming section from the normal section to the advantageous section is the same as the trigger for shifting the gaming state from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4.

  Also, the setting of the watermelon winning data may be an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section, and the watermelon winning data is set and the watermelon winning is established or the watermelon winning data is set and the watermelon winning is established. Not performing may be an opportunity to shift to an advantageous section. Also, the setting of the cherry winning data may be an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section, and the cherry winning data is set and the cherry winning is established or the cherry winning data is set and the cherry winning is established. Not performing may be an opportunity to shift to an advantageous section. Since the fact that the corresponding winning is not established is an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the transition to the advantageous section occurs when a so-called miss occurs.

  The setting of the bell winning data may be an opportunity to shift to an advantageous section, and the setting of the bell winning data and establishment of a bell prize may be an opportunity to shift to an advantageous section. Also, the setting of the normal replay winning data may be an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section, and the setting of the normal replay winning data and the establishment of the normal replay winning may be an opportunity to shift to the advantageous section. Is also good.

  In the case of each of the above-described configurations, the trigger that the gaming section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section does not completely match the trigger that the gaming state shifts from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4.

  (6) Transition to RT State ST6 In the lottery process, even if the transition to RT state ST6 has been won and the condition for transition to RT state ST6 has been satisfied, the transition to normal state ST1 will be made before the second promotion replay winning is established. In the event that a transition has occurred, the state in which the condition for transition to the RT state ST6 has been satisfied is not limited to a configuration in which the transition condition is satisfied. When the condition is satisfied, the state in which the transition condition is satisfied may not be released until the transition to the RT state ST6 occurs. This makes it possible to increase the degree of advantage that the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is satisfied.

  (7) Transition to RT state ST6 In the lottery process, if the transition to RT state ST6 has been won and the condition for transition to RT state ST6 has been satisfied, the process proceeds to RT state ST6 without waiting for the establishment of the second promotion replay winning. May be adopted. For example, in a case where a transitional win is made in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 in any of the normal state ST1, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5, the RT state starts from the next game. ST6 may be started. Further, in the BB state ST2, when a transfer win is made in the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6, the RT state ST6 may be started when the BB state ST2 ends. Further, in the RT state ST6, if a transitional winning is made in the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6, a new execution of the RT state ST6 may be started from the next game. As a result, the RT state ST6 can be started early.

  (8) A configuration in which the transition to the RT state ST6 does not occur unless it is an advantageous section may be adopted. In this case, since the transition to the RT state ST6 does not occur in the normal section, it is possible to increase the advantage of the advantageous section.

  (9) When the second promotion replay winning is established in the normal section and the state shifts to the RT state ST6, a low continuation rate or a 0% continuation rate is selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. Good. In the former case, even if the second promotion replay winning is established in the normal section and the state shifts to the RT state ST6, the probability of the continuous winning in the continuous lottery process executed when the RT state ST6 is once ended decreases. In the latter case, even if the second promotion replay winning is established in the normal section and the state shifts to the RT state ST6, when the RT state ST6 ends, the state shifts to the normal state ST1 before shifting to the RT state ST6 again. The probability increases. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of transition to the RT state ST6 in the advantageous section.

  (10) When the second promotion replay winning is established in the normal section and the state shifts to the RT state ST6, the game section may be maintained in the normal section in the RT state ST6. In this case, a situation occurs in which the section is in the RT state ST6 and is in the normal section. Therefore, the SB winning data is set in this situation, so that not only is the section set to the advantageous section but also the transition condition to the RT state ST6. Is satisfied, and the most advantageous 100% is selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6.

  (11) In the normal section, benefits such as the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the first promotion replay winning and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the second promotion replay winning are achieved. Although the notification of the stop order directly connected to the information is not executed, the notification of the stop order for the effect that is not directly connected to the profit may be executed. For example, when only the normal replay winning data is set, the normal replay winning is established irrespective of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the normal replay winning data is set in this manner, In a configuration in which the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified for the purpose of the effect, the notification of the stop order may be performed only in the normal section or in both the normal section and the advantageous section. By applying the configuration to a configuration in which the player cannot recognize or hardly recognize whether the game section is the normal section or the advantageous section, when the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, it is notified. The player expects that the transition condition of the RT state ST6 is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  (12) When the second promotion replay winning data is set in the second preparation state ST5, if the second promotion replay winning is established, the process shifts to the RT state ST6, and if the second promotion replay winning is not established. Is configured to shift to the normal state ST1, but the present invention is not limited to this. The index value IV that triggers the shift from the second preparation state ST5 to the RT state ST6 and the normal state ST5 The configuration may be different from the index value IV that causes the transition to the state ST1.

  (13) When the first promotion replay winning data is set in the first preparation state ST4, if the first promotion replay winning is established, the process proceeds to the second preparation state ST5, and the first promotion replay winning is not established. In this case, the transition from the first preparation state ST4 to the second preparation state ST5 is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The index value IV that causes the transition from the state ST4 to the normal state ST1 may be different.

  (14) In the normal state ST1, a configuration in which the transition to the RT state ST6 is not always won regardless of the number of games continuously executed in the normal state ST1, or a configuration in which the transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 is not executed may be adopted. . Accordingly, it is necessary to generate the BB state ST2 in order to cause the transition to the RT state ST6 in the middle of the normal state ST1, so that the player's attention to the BB state ST2 can be increased.

  (15) When the number of games continuously executed in the normal state ST1 reaches the upper limit game number on the normal side, the normal state ST1 ends and the process shifts to the first preparation state ST4. Alternatively or additionally, a transition to the first preparation state ST4 may occur when a predetermined transition combination is won, and a transition to the first preparation state ST4 occurs when a predetermined transition prize is established. It may be configured.

  (16) Only when the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed at the start of the first BB state results in the transfer lottery, the subsequent first 1BB state is triggered by the win of the index value IV = 2 or 3. It is good also as composition which performs the promotion lottery process of the continuation rate of RT state ST6. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 executed at the start of the first BB state.

  (17) The player in the first preparation state ST4 is higher than the post-bonus state ST3 because the first preparation state ST4 has a higher replay winning probability or the expected number of game media to be provided than the post-bonus state ST3. May be advantageous. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the transition from the post-bonus state ST3 to the first preparation state ST4.

  (18) If the advantageous section ends in the situation where the RT state ST6 is an advantageous section, the RT state ST6 may also end at that point. In this case, when the RT state ST6 is completed, the configuration may shift to the normal state ST1, the configuration may shift to the post-bonus state ST3, or the configuration may shift to the first preparation state ST4. It may be configured to shift to the preparation state ST5. Further, instead of the RT state ST6, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the bell prize is notified as in the eighth embodiment, and the probability that the replay prize is established does not increase. In the configuration for shifting to the AT state, if the advantageous section ends in a situation where the AT state is an advantageous section, the AT state may end at that point.

  (19) The notification for causing the player to recognize the game section may be executed in a section other than the advantageous section display section 67. For example, at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 may be configured to perform an effect that allows a player to recognize which game section is. Further, in addition to or instead of these configurations, a configuration may be adopted in which information indicating which game section it is is externally output to a hall computer of a game hall.

  (20) Transition to the RT State ST6 When the lottery process is executed, the lottery process may be notified to the player. Further, when the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 is executed, the result may be notified to the player. The mode of this notification is arbitrary. For example, the notification may be performed using an effect of at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

  In addition, even when the continuous lottery process or the promotion lottery process is executed, the configuration may be such that the player is notified, and the result thereof may be reported to the player. The mode of this notification is arbitrary. For example, the notification may be performed using an effect of at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

  (21) When the first BB prize is established in the advantageous section, the gaming section may be set to the normal section once in the first BB state and then set to the advantageous section again. Thereby, even if the first BB prize is established in the advantageous section, it is possible to execute the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 triggered by resetting to the advantageous section. In this case, for example, the game section may be set to the normal section at the start of the first BB state, and the game section may be set to the advantageous section when the first BB state ends, and the game section may be set to the normal at the start of the first BB state. The game section may be set as an advantageous section based on the fact that the game section is set as the section and the opportunity is won in the lottery process of the combination in the first BB state or the opportunity winning is established.

  (22) Transition to the RT state ST6 The probability that the variable element for changing the execution mode of the lottery process according to the gaming state ST1 to ST6 at that time becomes the transition to the RT state ST6, or RT It is not limited to the continuation rate of the state ST6. For example, although the probability of transition to the RT state ST6 is the same in any of the game states ST1 to ST6, the transition to the RT state ST6 is a win. In this case, the continuation rate to be selected may be different depending on the game state. For example, the probability of transition to the RT state ST6 to win is the same in any of the game states ST1 to ST6, but the RT state ST6. The selection mode of the number of continuous games in the RT state ST6 selected when the transition to the game has been won may be different depending on the gaming states ST1 to ST6.

  (23) The end state of the RT state ST6 is not limited to the configuration in which the number of games executed in the RT state ST6 is the number of games to be ended. For example, a fall for terminating the RT state ST6. When the replay winning exists, the falling replay winning data is set, and when the falling replay winning is established, the RT state ST6 ends, and the falling replay winning is established even if the falling replay winning data is set. Otherwise, the configuration may be such that the RT state ST6 is maintained. In this case, in the state of RT state ST6 and the advantageous section, when the fall replay winning data is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the fall replay winning is notified, In the case of the RT state ST6 and a normal section, even if the fall replay winning data is set, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can avoid the establishment of the fall replay winning may not be notified.

  (24) Although the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 does not result in the transfer winning when the first table for the normal state is referred to, the transfer winning may be adopted. In this case, in order to increase the advantage of performing the lottery process to the RT state ST6 in another gaming state, the case where the first table for the normal state is referred to rather than the case where another table is referred to Is configured to have a lower probability of transfer winning. Further, when the second table for the normal state is referred to, the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 is configured to surely achieve the transfer winning, but a configuration in which the transfer win may not be performed may be adopted. In this case, in order to increase the advantage of referring to the second table for the normal state in the normal state ST1, the second table for the normal state is referred to more than the case where the first table for the normal state is referred to. In such a case, it is assumed that there is a higher probability of the transfer winning. In addition, when the tables for various states are referred to, the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 is configured to surely achieve the transfer win, but a configuration in which the transfer win may not occur may be adopted. In this case, in order to increase the advantage of the execution of the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 in the various game states ST3 to ST5, the table for the various states is referred to more than when the first table for the normal state is referred to. Is configured to be more likely to be the transfer winning when reference is made.

  (25) In any of the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, and the second preparation state ST5, the table referred to in the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 is common as a table for various states. Although the configuration has been described, a configuration may be adopted in which a table is set corresponding to each of these game states ST3 to ST5. In this case, the table referred to in the post-bonus state ST3 may have the most advantageous configuration, the table referred to in the first preparation state ST4 may be the most advantageous configuration, and is referred to in the second preparation state ST5. A table may be the most advantageous configuration.

  (26) When the transition to the BB state ST2 occurs while the advantageous end preparation flag is set to “1”, the advantageous end preparation flag may be cleared to “0”. For example, if the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established in the advantageous section where the advantageous end preparation flag is set to “1”, the advantageous end preparation flag is set to “0” when shifting to the BB state ST2. "clear. Accordingly, the state is shifted to the advantageous section and the value of the advantageous end preparation flag is “0” along with the transition to the BB state ST2. Therefore, when the state transitions to the first preparation state ST4, the first promotion is performed. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the replay winning is notified, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32 that enable the establishment of the second promoted replay winning when the process proceeds to the second preparation state ST5. The stop order of 32R is notified.

  (27) In the BB state ST2, the number of games executed in the advantageous section is also measured as the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the number of games executed in the BB state ST2 is an advantageous section, the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section may not be counted. In this case, if the start of the BB state ST2 is an advantageous section, the advantageous section is set to be an advantageous section even after the end of the BB state ST2. The configuration is taken over even after the end of ST2. According to this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the continuous game number in the advantageous section to reach the upper limit game number.

  (28) In the BB state ST2, the game section may not be set. In this case, even if the BB state ST2 is started in the advantageous section, the number of games executed in the BB state ST2 is not counted as the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous section. Further, in this configuration, when the BB state ST2 starts before the start of the BB state ST2, the advantageous section continues after the end of the BB state ST2. The number is taken over even after the end of the BB state ST2. According to this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the continuous game number in the advantageous section to reach the upper limit game number.

  (29) When calculating the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section to the total number of games, the number of games executed in the BB state ST2 may not be added as the total number of games in the advantageous section.

  (30) The calculation of the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous section to the total number of games may be performed for each set value. In this case, even if the set values are changed, it is necessary to adopt a configuration in which the calculation is continued without initializing the information of the ratio performed for each set value. According to this configuration, it is possible to grasp the ratio for each set value.

  (31) In the board box 81, a blocking sheet may be provided in a facing area facing the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 in a facing wall portion facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71. The shielding sheet is provided to make the inside of the substrate box 81, more specifically, the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 invisible through the region where the shielding sheet is provided in the substrate box 81. . Specifically, a hologram sheet is provided as a blocking sheet, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a reflection sheet or a diffuse reflection sheet is provided may be employed. Since the blocking sheet is provided, even if the area where the blocking sheet is provided in the board box 81 is viewed from the front, the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 can be viewed by the presence of the blocking sheet. Becomes impossible. Thereby, when the front door 12 is opened to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 for the purpose of maintenance or the like in a situation where a game is being played in the slot machine 10, the first to third notifications are issued by the player. The possibility that the display devices 85 to 87 are visually observed is reduced. On the other hand, since the blocking sheet is provided in a part of the opposing wall portion, the opposing wall portion is obliquely viewed toward the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 so that these first wall portions are obliquely viewed. The display surfaces of the display devices 85 to 87 for the third notification can be viewed from outside the substrate box 81. Therefore, the manager of the game hall can visually check the notification contents of the respective determination results on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 from outside the board box 81.

  Incidentally, the configuration may be such that the blocking sheet is not provided in a region facing the main MPU 72 in the facing wall portion. Thereby, even if the blocking sheet is provided, it is possible to prevent the visibility at the time of visually confirming the main MPU 72 from being reduced.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure provided with the member which reduces the visibility of the 1st-3rd notification display devices 85-87 instead of the blocking sheet. For example, a sheet that is colored and transparent but has low transparency may be provided instead of the blocking sheet. In this case, when the sheet is viewed from the front, the display surfaces of the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 can be visually recognized, but the display contents on the display surface are difficult to see.

  (32) Regardless of which of the gaming states ST1 to ST6, the total number of games that have been consumed and the number of advantageous games that have been consumed in the advantageous section are stored as history information, and the total games are stored. Although the configuration is such that the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the number is calculated, the present invention is not limited to this. The number of wins and the total number of games of the predetermined combination to be selected in the combination lottery process (FIG. 13) are recorded. The information may be stored as information and the winning probability of the predetermined combination may be calculated. In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as target predetermined combinations, and the number of wins is individually stored as history information for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination, and the first combination is stored in the first combination. The winning combination may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. Further, the number of wins may be individually stored as history information for each of all the combinations, and the winning probability may be calculated for each of the combinations. This makes it possible to notify the winning probability of the managed combination to the manager of the gaming hall.

  Further, the total number of game media provided and the total game number may be stored as history information, and the number of game media provided per unit game may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the number of game media provided per unit game. In addition, the combination of the total number of game media and the total number of games are stored as history information individually for each of the game states ST1 to ST6 and the advantageous section, and the number of game media provided per unit game is stored. It is good also as composition which calculates individually about each game state ST1-ST6 and each advantageous section.

  Also, the number of transitions to the BB state ST2 and the total number of games played in the game states ST1, ST3 to ST6 other than the BB state ST2 are stored as history information, and the transition probability to the BB state ST2 is calculated. It may be. Further, the number of transitions to the RT state ST6 and the total number of games played in the game states ST1 to ST5 other than the RT state ST6 may be stored as history information, and the transition probability to the RT state ST6 may be calculated. Good.

  (33) The display of each determination result on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 is started when the display period of the check result is entered and ended when the display period of the check result is ended. Is also good. When the sensor that detects opening of the front door 12 detects that the front door 12 has been opened with respect to the housing 11, each of the immediately preceding determinations in the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87. The display of the result is started, and when it is detected by the sensor that detects the opening of the front door 12 that the front door 12 is closed with respect to the housing 11, the first to third notification display devices are provided. The display of each determination result in steps 85 to 87 may be terminated. In this case, it is possible to limit the period during which display is performed on the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87.

  (34) Although the remaining number of continuous games in the RT state ST6 is not notified, the remaining number of continuous games may be notified. Further, although the configuration is such that the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous period is not reported, the configuration may be such that the number of games continuously executed is reported. As the execution mode of the notification of the number of games, for example, a configuration in which the notification is performed by the image display device 63 or a configuration in which the notification is performed by the dedicated display unit may be performed.

  (35) When the RT state ST6 ends, the continuous lottery process is executed, and when the continuous lottery process does not result in continuous winning, the condition for shifting to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. However, in addition to or instead of the above configuration, when the number of games to be continued in the RT state ST6 is equal to the number of games corresponding to the end, one execution of the RT state ST6 is performed. May be adopted. In this case, when one execution cycle of the RT state ST6 is completed, it is determined whether or not a stock execution cycle exists, and if there is a stock execution cycle, the execution cycle concerned is determined. May be subtracted by one and a new execution of the RT state ST6 may be started. In this configuration, when the advantageous section is completed and the advantageous section initialization process is executed, the number of executions that are stocked may be cleared to “0”. As a result, it is possible to make the transition condition of the RT state ST6 not satisfied at the end of the advantageous section.

  (36) When the advantageous section ends when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number, the advantageous section is set next time depending on whether or not the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied at that time. In such a case, the configuration may have different advantages. For example, when the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied when the advantageous section ends by reaching the upper limit number of games, the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is longer than when the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is not satisfied. May be configured to increase the probability of the transfer winning in the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed when setting the advantageous section, and the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed when setting the next advantageous section. In the case where the transition winning is achieved, a high continuation rate may be easily selected as the continuation rate of the RT state ST6. Thereby, it is possible to compensate the player for the forcible termination of the advantageous section when the upper limit game number is reached.

  (37) In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the advantageous section ends when the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number, the result of the end lottery process executed in the advantageous section is the end winning result. In such a case, the configuration may be such that the advantageous section ends and shifts to the normal section. The timing at which the end lottery process is executed is arbitrary.For example, the end lottery process may be executed in each game, such as when a predetermined lottery opportunity is won or a predetermined lottery opportunity winning is achieved. The end lottery process may be executed at the end. In addition, provided that the number of continuous games in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, an end lottery process is executed each time a lottery opportunity occurs, and it is advantageous when the result of the end lottery process is an end winning result. The configuration may be such that the section ends and shifts to the normal section.

  (38) In the advantageous section, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, so that the advantageous section is not limited to a configuration in which the advantageous section is more advantageous than the normal section. In such a case, the advantageous section may be more advantageous than the normal section by increasing the number of game media to be provided, and the number of game media required to start one game may be smaller than the normal section. The advantageous section may be configured to be more advantageous.

  (39) The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which the first to third notification display devices 85 to 87 are performed. For example, the credit display unit 65 and the dual use display unit 66 are used. It is good also as a structure performed by doing. Further, in the configuration, when there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, each type of event to be notified may be sequentially switched and displayed. In the case of switching and displaying in this manner, for example, the type of the event to be notified is displayed on the credit display unit 65, and the calculation result or the content of the calculation result for the event to be notified is displayed on the shared display unit 66. The corresponding information may be displayed. Thus, even when there are a plurality of types of notification target events, it is possible to notify the plurality of types of notification target events using a small number of display units.

  (40) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the upper limit game number of the number of continuous games is set also in the normal section. In this case, when the number of games continuously executed in the normal section reaches the upper limit number of games, the setting of the SB winning data and the setting of the advantageous section even when the establishment of the first BB winning has not occurred. Become. Further, in the transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed when setting the advantageous section, a configuration in which the transfer winning is surely achieved may be adopted. This makes it possible to compensate for the fact that the normal section has been continued until the upper limit number of games is reached. In addition, by setting the upper limit game number in the normal section to be the same between the setting values of “Setting 1” to “Setting 6”, it is possible to prevent the setting value from having an advantage or disadvantage with respect to the upper limit game number. It becomes possible.

  (41) Even when the front door 12 is in the open state, an operation unit operated to forcibly bring the lighting devices 88a and 88b into the non-lighting state may be provided. In this case, when illumination by the illumination devices 88a and 88b is unnecessary, the illumination devices 88a and 88b can be set to the non-illumination state. The operation unit may be provided at a position where the front door 12 can be operated even when the front door 12 is closed. When the front door 12 is opened, the operation unit cannot operate when the front door 12 is closed. It may be configured to be provided at a position where it can be operated.

  (42) When the front door 12 is in the open state, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are always in the illuminated state, and when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are always in the non-illuminated state. The configuration may be as follows.

  (43) Even if the front door 12 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are maintained in the non-illuminated state until the front door 12 reaches the predetermined opening angle, and thereafter, the lighting devices 88a and 88b become the predetermined opening angle or more. The lighting devices 88a and 88b may be configured to be in the lighting state. Further, in addition to the above configuration, when the front door 12 is at the maximum open position as in the above embodiment, the illumination devices 88a and 88b may be in a non-illumination state.

  (44) The intensity of light emitted from the lighting devices 88a and 88b may be changed according to the opening angle of the front door 12. For example, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the lighting devices 88a and 88b are in the non-illuminated state or in the illuminated state with relatively low intensity, the front door 12 is in the open state, and the opening angle of the front door 12 is a predetermined open state. When the angle is equal to or less than the angle, the illumination state may be set to a relatively high intensity, and when the opening angle of the front door 12 exceeds a predetermined opening angle, the illumination state may be set to a relatively low intensity.

  (45) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of valid lines is only one of the main lines ML, and may be a configuration in which the number of valid lines is two, three, four or more. In this case, the number of active lines may increase as the number of game media bet increases, or the maximum number of active lines may be set irrespective of the number of game media bet.

  (46) The type of information transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the staging MPU 92 is not limited to that in each of the above embodiments. For example, when a prize corresponding to the award of a game medium is established, the prize is awarded. The information on the number of game media to be played may be transmitted from the main MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92. In this case, information on the number of game media provided by winning can be notified on the image display device 63 or the like. In addition, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, when the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the information corresponding to the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is transmitted to the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the production side MPU 92. In this case, an effect corresponding to the rotation state of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be performed on the image display device 63 or the like.

  (47) In each of the above embodiments, a configuration is provided in which a privilege of paying out medals is provided when a small role prize is established. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which a certain privilege is provided to a player. Should be fine. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a prize other than a medal is paid out when a small winning combination is established. Further, in a slot machine that does not have a real medal insertion or medal payout function and manages medals owned by a player as credits, an increase in credited medals corresponds to awarding of a privilege.

  (48) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B type slot machine, and may be a C type, a composite type of A type and C type, a composite type of B type and C type, furthermore, an RT game, a CT game or an AT. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine such as a type equipped with a game.

  (49) The design of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is not limited to a picture, a number, a character or the like, but may be a geometric line or figure. Further, it is possible to compose a pattern by light, color, or the like, to compose a pattern by a three-dimensional shape or the like, and to compose a pattern by combining these. That is, the symbol may be any as long as it has a function as information having distinctiveness.

  (50) In each of the above embodiments, an example has been described in which the slot machine 10 is embodied. However, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a game is played using a game ball as a game medium. The present invention may be applied to a game machine of a type in which a game machine is integrated.

<About the inventions extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above-described embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. A state transition in which the gaming state is shifted between a plurality of types of gaming states having different degrees of advantage (normal state ST1, BB state ST2, bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5, RT state ST6). Means (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S704, S803, S902, S905, S906, S1002, S1005, S1007, S1307, S1602 and S1605 in the main MPU 72 In the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S2402, S2405 and S2408 in the main MPU 72)
First section setting means for setting a game section to a first section (normal section) (a function of executing an advantageous section end process in the main MPU 72);
Second section setting means for setting the game section as a second section (advantageous section) (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S1404, S1411, and S1414 in the main MPU 72, the sixth embodiment Then, the function of executing the process of step S2804 in the main MPU 72)
With
In one of the first section and the second section, a privilege that does not occur in the other can be given to the player, or in one of the first section and the second section, a privilege is given to the player more than the other. Easy configuration,
Each of the first section and the second section is a predetermined game state (a first BB state, a post-bonus state ST3, a first preparation state ST4, a second preparation state ST5, and an RT state ST6) of the plurality of types of game states. ), Wherein the player can stay in another game state (the normal state ST1, the BB state ST2, the post-bonus state ST3, the first preparation state ST4, the second preparation state ST5, and the RT) among the plurality of types of game states. State ST6).
This gaming machine is
The predetermined game state and the condition of the second section are defined as at least one condition that the condition of the first section has occurred; Unlike the case where the situation of the first section does not occur, related processing executing means (RT using a table for various states in the main MPU 72) that enables related processing related to the player's profit to be executed. A function of executing a transition lottery process to the state ST6, a function of executing a transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 using the RT state table in the main MPU 72),
When the predetermined condition is satisfied (the number of games continued in the advantageous section in the first BB state, the first preparation state ST4 or the second preparation state ST5 reaches the upper limit number of games, and the bonus state after the end of the second BB state) The process proceeds to ST3, the process proceeds to the RT state ST6 in a situation where the number of games continued in the advantageous section is equal to or greater than the number of opportunity games). And a predetermined response means (a negative determination is made in step S1413 in the main MPU 72) to prevent the situation of the first game section from being in the predetermined game state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. And the function of executing the process of step S1911 in the main MPU 72);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature A1, the progress of the game can be diversified by the presence of a plurality of types of game states and the presence of a plurality of types of game sections. In addition, one of the first section and the second section has a configuration in which the privilege is more easily provided than the other, and both the first section and the second section can stay in the predetermined gaming state and other gaming states. Therefore, the player plays a game while expecting an advantageous gaming state and an advantageous gaming section.

  In this case, when the situation that is the predetermined game state and the first section occurs, the situation that the predetermined game state and the second section occur, but the predetermined game state and the first section occurs. Unlike the case where the game has not occurred, the related processing relating to the player's profit can be executed, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, a situation where the game state is the predetermined game state and the first section occurs. Accordingly, the player expects that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined game state is established, and the situation of the first section occurs, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature A2. When the specific event (the end of the first BB state, the SB winning data is set) occurs in the situation where the predetermined game state is the first section, The gaming machine according to Feature A1, characterized in that the related process can be executed differently from the case where the specific event occurs in a predetermined gaming state and the second section.

  According to the feature A2, when the situation is the first game section in the predetermined game state, the related process is not reliably executed, but the specific event occurs in the situation of the first game state and the first section. Then, the related processing is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible for the player who expects the execution of the related processing to change the target of interest step by step, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature A3. The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the second section setting means sets the game section to the second section when the specific event occurs in the first section.

  According to the feature A3, when a specific event occurs in a situation where the game state is the first section in the predetermined game state, the situation is a game state in the second section and the related process is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the occurrence of the specific event in the situation where the predetermined game state is the first section.

  Feature A4. The gaming machine according to feature A2 or A3, wherein the occurrence of the specific event includes winning a specific combination in a combination lottery process.

  According to the feature A4, the player who expects the execution of the related process is expected to win the specific combination by the lottery process of the combination in the situation where the predetermined game state is the first section. This makes it easy for the player who expects the execution of the related process to recognize the target to be noticed.

  Feature A5. Based on the occurrence of the specific event in the other game state and the first section, it is possible to generate the predetermined game state or a state in which a transition to the predetermined game state is likely to occur. (A function of executing the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 using the first table for the normal state, the second table for the normal state, or the table for the first BB state in the main MPU 72) The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, comprising:

  According to the feature A5, it is possible to generate a predetermined game state or a state in which a transition to the predetermined game state is likely to occur based on the occurrence of a specific event in a state that is a first section in another game state. Is performed. Further, it is possible to execute the related processing based on the fact that the specific event has occurred in the situation of the first section having the configuration of the above-described feature A2 in the predetermined gaming state and the first section. Accordingly, it is possible to give the player a recognition that the specific event occurs in the situation of the first section, and that the player has some advantage, and the player is not aware that the specific event occurs in the situation of the first section. The degree of attention can be increased.

  Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein the specific event is that the predetermined gaming state ends.

  According to the feature A6, the related processing is executed when the situation of the first game section in the predetermined game state ends. This makes it easier for the player to understand the conditions for executing the related processing.

  Feature A7. The above-mentioned predetermined correspondence means, when the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied, from the start of the above-mentioned predetermined game state to the state of the above-mentioned predetermined game state and being the first section, any of the features A2 to A6 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A7, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined game state is set from the start of the predetermined game state to the first section. Then, when a specific event occurs in the situation, a related process related to the profit of the player can be executed. This makes it possible to increase the frequency at which the related processing is executed.

  Feature A8. In the predetermined gaming state and the second section, the lottery process is executed in the lottery process (the process of shifting to the RT state ST6 executed by using the table for the first BB state in the main MPU 72). In this case, a profit is given to the player, and in a case where the predetermined gaming state is the first section, the benefit is given to the player by executing the related processing thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7.

  According to the feature A8, in the situation of the second section in the predetermined game state, the profit is not given to the player unless the winning is performed in the occurrence lottery process, whereas the situation is the first section in the predetermined game state. If it does, the player is given a benefit by executing the related processing thereafter. Thereby, it is possible to provide a profit regardless of the situation of the first section and the situation of the second section in the predetermined game state, and the advantage to the situation of the first section in the predetermined game state. Can be increased.

  Feature A9. In the second section, the privilege that does not occur in the first section can be given to a player, or in the second section, the benefit is more easily given to the player than in the first section. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8.

  According to the feature A9, if only the game section is compared, the second section is more advantageous than the first section. In this case, by providing the configuration of the above-described feature A1, in the situation where the game is in the predetermined game state and the first section, the situation is the predetermined game state and the second section, which is different from the situation where the game is in the second section and is related to the profit of the player. Related processing may be performed. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the situation where the game state is the predetermined zone and the first section.

Feature A10. The state transition means is configured to transition a game state from the other game state to the predetermined game state when a predetermined transition trigger (the establishment of a second promotion replay prize) occurs in the other game state,
The predetermined transition trigger is generated when the other game state is the second section, and the predetermined transition trigger is not generated when the other game state is the first section, or The features A1 to A3, wherein the predetermined transition trigger is more likely to occur in the other game state and the second section than in the other game state and the first section. The gaming machine according to any one of A9.

  According to the feature A10, when the game state is the first section in another game state, the transition to the predetermined game state does not occur or is unlikely to occur. Therefore, it is determined that the game state is the second section in the other game state. Would expect. On the other hand, when the game state is the predetermined game state and the first section, the related processing related to the player's profit may be executed. As a result, it is possible to make the type of the game section that the player expects to generate differ depending on the type of the game state, and to make the player pay attention to both the first section and the second section.

  Feature A11. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied based on that the number of games executed in the second section reaches a predetermined number of games.

  According to the feature A11, when the number of games executed in the situation of the second section reaches the predetermined number of games, the game is in the predetermined game state and is in the state of the first section, and in this situation, the profit of the player is reduced. Related related processing may be performed. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games executed in the situation of the second section.

Feature A12. A second section ending means for ending the second section based on the fact that the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the second section reaches the upper limit game number (in the first embodiment, the main MPU 72 A function of executing the processing of step S1911, in the fourth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2611 in the main MPU 72).
In the situation where the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the second section is within the range of the predetermined game number and the upper limit game number, the predetermined condition is determined based on the transition to the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to feature A11, wherein the gaming machine is established.

  According to the feature A12, since the second section ends based on the fact that the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, the second section is excessively continued. On the other hand, it is regrettable that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games for the player who wants to continue the second section. On the other hand, if the transition to the predetermined game state occurs in a situation where the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the second section is within the range from the predetermined game number to the upper limit game number, the predetermined game state Then, the situation is the first section, and when the situation is reached, a related process related to the profit of the player can be executed. Accordingly, even if the number of games continued in the situation of the second section approaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the degree of interest in the game from being reduced.

  Feature A13. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied based on a completion condition of the second section being satisfied in the predetermined game state.

  According to the feature A13, when the end condition of the second section is satisfied in the situation where the game state is the second section in the predetermined game state, the situation becomes the first section in the predetermined game state. Then, in such a situation, a related process related to the profit of the player can be executed. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the end condition of the second section is satisfied in the middle of the predetermined game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A14. Second section ending means (the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment) for ending the second section based on the fact that the number of games continuously executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games. Function for executing the processing of step S3010).
Any one of the features A1 to A13, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the fact that the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the second section reaches the upper limit game number in the predetermined game state. 2. The gaming machine according to item 1.

  According to the feature A14, the second section ends based on the fact that the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, so that the second section is excessively continued. On the other hand, it is regrettable that the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games for the player who wants to continue the second section. On the other hand, when the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in the predetermined game state, the situation is the predetermined game state and the first section. If so, a related process related to the interest of the player can be executed. Accordingly, even if the number of games continued in the situation of the second section approaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the degree of interest in the game from being reduced.

Feature A15. The state transition means is configured to transition a game state from the other game state to the predetermined game state when a predetermined transition trigger (the establishment of a second promotion replay prize) occurs in the other game state,
The feature according to any one of A11 to A14, wherein, based on an operation of the player in the other game state, it is possible to stay in the other game state while preventing occurrence of the predetermined transition trigger. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A15, the transition timing to the predetermined game state can be delayed by the operation of the player. The game apparatus has the configuration of any one of the features A11 to A14, and a predetermined condition is satisfied in relation to the number of games executed in the second section. The situation is one section. As a result, it is possible to generate a situation that is a predetermined game state and is the first section by an operation of the player himself.

Feature A16. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
Role lottery means for executing a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means (a function of executing a lottery process of a role in the main MPU 72);
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the change display of the picture on the picture display means;
The pattern change display is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern change display is stopped based on the stop operation means being operated. Picture display control means for controlling the display means (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the change display of the pattern, the corresponding execution of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Means (a function of executing a winning determination process, a medium providing process, and a process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
With
In the lottery process of the combination, the correspondence execution unit sets a predetermined correspondence combination (in the first to seventh embodiments, an index value IV in which first promotion replay winning data is set and second promotion replay winning data). The index value IV, the index value IV in which the bell winning data is set in the eighth embodiment, the index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set, and the index value IV in which the second promotion replay winning data is set) Based on the winning operation and the stop operation mode of the variation display of the pattern being a predetermined mode, predetermined corresponding execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S905 and S1005 in the main MPU 72) for executing the corresponding control )
This gaming machine corresponds to one of the modes for preventing the predetermined mode and the predetermined mode from being set in the second section when the predetermined corresponding role is won in the lottery process of the role. Features A1 to A15 characterized by having notification control means (a function of executing a notification control process in the main MPU 72 and a function of executing a notification process in the production side MPU 92) for executing the predetermined notification. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature A16, in the second section, when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the predetermined notification is executed. Therefore, by performing the stop operation in the mode corresponding to the predetermined notification, the profit corresponding thereto is obtained. Can be obtained. In this case, the configuration of the feature A1 is provided, and the related processing can be executed by being in the predetermined game state and being in the first section, thereby increasing the player's attention to the first section. It becomes possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A16, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A predetermined privilege (in the first to seventh embodiments, notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R enabling the establishment of the first promotion replay winning and reels 32L, 32C, enabling the establishment of the second promotion replay winning) In the eighth embodiment, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the bell prize and the reels 32L and 32M that enable the establishment of the first promotion replay prize are notified in the eighth embodiment. , 32R, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable the establishment of the second promotion replay prize) are set to the advantageous section provided to the player. In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1404, S1411, and S1414 in the main MPU 72 is used. In the sixth embodiment, the function of the main MPU 72 is executed. Processing in step S2804 and the ability to perform) in PU72,
An advantageous section ending means (a function of executing an advantageous section ending process in the main MPU 72) for executing an ending process of the advantageous section based on occurrence of an end trigger in the situation of the advantageous section;
When the predetermined game state (RT state ST6) is started, the end processing is executed or the predetermined game state (first BB state, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5, and RT state) ST6) and at least one condition that the end processing is executed in the middle of the advantageous section is a condition where the end processing is performed in the predetermined gaming state and the advantageous section. Unlike the case where the predetermined game state is terminated without being executed, related processing execution means (RT using a table for various states in the main MPU 72) that enables related processing related to the player's profit to be executed. The function of executing the lottery process for shifting to the state ST6, and the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 using the RT state table in the main MPU 72 A row function to),
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the advantageous section end processing is executed when the predetermined game state is started, or the advantageous section end processing is executed in the middle of the situation where the predetermined game state is the advantageous section. May be performed as at least one condition. Thereby, even when the predetermined game state is started or when the end processing of the advantageous section is executed in the middle of the predetermined game state, the player's feeling of the end of the advantageous section is compensated by executing the related processing. Becomes possible. In addition, a player who expects the related process to be executed expects the end of the advantageous section to be executed when the predetermined game state is started or during the predetermined game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the end opportunity occurs when at least one condition is that the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number of games.

  According to the feature B2, the end process of the advantageous section is executed on at least one condition that the number of games executed in the situation of the advantageous section reaches the predetermined number of games. Then, a related process related to a profit of the player may be executed on the condition that the predetermined game state is started or that the process of ending the advantageous section is executed in the middle of the predetermined game state. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games executed in the advantageous section situation.

Feature B3. The advantageous section end means includes:
As the end opportunity, the means for executing the end processing based on the fact that the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games (in the first embodiment, the main MPU 72 A function of making an affirmative determination in step S1910 and executing the processing of step S1911, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2610 and executing the processing of step S2611 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment);
As the end opportunity, based on the occurrence of the transition to the predetermined game state in a situation where the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the advantageous section is within the range of the predetermined number of games and the upper limit number of games, Means for executing the end processing (in the first embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step S1913 in the main MPU 72 and executing the processing in step S1911; in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing in step S2613 in the main MPU 72) Function to make an affirmative determination and execute the process of step S2611);
The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or B2, comprising:

  According to the feature B3, the advantageous section is terminated based on the fact that the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous section does not continue excessively. On the other hand, it is unfortunate that for a player who wishes to continue the advantageous section, the number of games reaches the upper limit number of games. On the other hand, if the transition to the predetermined game state occurs in a situation where the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the advantageous section is within the range from the predetermined number of games to the upper limit number of games, the transition to the predetermined game state occurs. By executing the end process, a related process related to the profit of the player can be executed. As a result, even if the number of games continued in the situation of the advantageous section approaches the upper limit game number, it is possible to prevent the degree of interest in the game from being reduced.

Feature B4. State transition means (mainly for shifting the game state from the other game state to the predetermined game state when a predetermined transition trigger (establishment of a second promotion replay winning) occurs in another game state (second preparation state ST5). Function for executing the processing of step S1005 in the side MPU 72)
The gaming machine according to Feature B2 or B3, wherein it is possible to stay in the other gaming state while preventing the occurrence of the predetermined transition trigger based on a player's operation in the other gaming state. .

  According to the feature B4, the transition timing to the predetermined game state can be delayed by the operation of the player. When the predetermined game state is started in relation to the number of games executed in the advantageous section or the middle of the predetermined game state, the processing of ending the advantageous section is performed. Related processing related to the interests of the user may be performed. As a result, a situation in which the related process can be executed can be generated by the player's own operation.

  Feature B5. When the specific event (the first BB state ends, the SB winning data is set) occurs in a situation where the predetermined game state is not the advantageous section, the related processing execution means may execute the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein unlike the case where the specific event occurs in a situation where the game state is the advantageous section, the related processing can be executed. .

  According to the feature B5, when the situation is the predetermined game state and the situation is not the advantageous section, the related process is not executed reliably, and the specific event occurs in the situation of the predetermined game state and the situation is not the advantageous section. The related processing is executed. Thereby, it becomes possible for the player who expects the execution of the related processing to change the target of interest step by step, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature B6. The advantageous section end means executes the end processing when the predetermined gaming state is started, based on the occurrence of the end trigger when the predetermined gaming state is started. The gaming machine according to B5.

  According to the feature B6, when the end opportunity has occurred when the predetermined game state is started, the situation is the predetermined game state from the start of the predetermined game state and is not an advantageous section. In this situation, the probability that a specific event will occur can be increased.

  Feature B7. The gaming machine according to the feature B5 or B6, wherein when the specific event occurs in a situation where the advantageous section is a non-advantageous section (normal section), the gaming section is set as the advantageous section. .

  According to the feature B7, when a specific event occurs in a situation where the game state is the predetermined game state and the section is the non-advantaged section, the situation is a state where the game state is the predetermined game state and the area is the advantageous section and the related process is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the occurrence of the specific event in the situation where the game state is the predetermined game state and the non-advantage section.

  Feature B8. The game according to any one of features B5 to B7, wherein the occurrence of the specific event includes winning a specific combination (index value IV in which SB winning data is set) in a combination lottery process. Machine.

  According to the feature B8, the player who expects the execution of the related process expects to win the specific combination by the lottery process of the combination in the situation where the game is in the predetermined game state and is not the advantageous section. This makes it easy for the player who expects the execution of the related process to recognize the target to be noticed.

  Feature B9. Based on the occurrence of the specific event in a state other than the advantageous section in another game state, it is possible to generate the predetermined game state or a state in which a transition to the predetermined game state is likely to occur. Means for executing the process (the function of executing the lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 using the first table for the normal state, the second table for the normal state, or the table for the first BB state in the main MPU 72) The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B8, comprising:

  According to the feature B9, it is possible to generate a predetermined game state or a state in which a transition to the predetermined game state is likely to occur based on the occurrence of a specific event in another game state and not in an advantageous section. Is performed. Further, the related processing can be executed based on the fact that a specific event has occurred in a situation where the game is in a predetermined gaming state and is not an advantageous section provided with the configuration of the feature B5. As a result, it is possible to give the player recognition that the specific event occurs in a situation other than the advantageous section, and the player's attention to the occurrence of the specific event in the situation other than the advantageous section. Can be increased.

  Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B9, wherein the specific event is that the predetermined gaming state ends.

  According to the feature B10, the related process is executed by ending the situation in which the game state is the predetermined game state and is not the advantageous section. This makes it easier for the player to understand the conditions for executing the related processing.

  Feature B11. In the situation of the predetermined gaming state and the advantageous section, the lottery is generated in the generated lottery process (transition lottery process to the RT state ST6 executed by using the table for the first BB state in the main MPU 72). In this case, a profit is provided to the player, and in a case where the predetermined gaming state is not the advantageous section, the benefit is provided to the player by executing the related processing thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B10.

  According to the feature B11, in a situation where the section is an advantageous section in the predetermined gaming state, a profit is not provided to the player unless an occurrence winning is performed in the occurrence lottery process, whereas a situation where the section is not an advantageous section in the predetermined gaming state. In this case, a profit is given to the player by executing the related processing thereafter. Thereby, it is possible to provide a profit even if the situation is a non-advantage section or a situation that is an advantageous section in the predetermined game state, while increasing the degree of advantage of being in a state that is not an advantageous section in the predetermined game state. It is possible to increase.

Feature B12. The state transition means is configured to transition a game state from the other game state to the predetermined game state when a predetermined transition trigger (a second promotion replay winning prize is established) occurs in another game state,
When the other game state is the advantageous section, the predetermined transition trigger is generated, and when the other game state is not the advantageous section, the predetermined transition trigger is not generated, or the other transition state is not generated. Any one of the features B1 to B11, wherein the predetermined transition trigger is more likely to occur in the gaming state and the advantageous section than in the other gaming state and not in the advantageous section. 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature B12, the transition to the predetermined gaming state does not occur or is unlikely to occur when the game state is another gaming state and is not an advantageous section. You will expect it. On the other hand, when the game state is the predetermined game state and is not the advantageous section, the related processing related to the player's profit may be executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the type of the game section that the player expects to generate differ depending on the type of the game state, and to make the player pay attention to both the non-advantaged section and the non-advantaged section. .

Feature B13. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
Combination lottery means for executing a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72);
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the change display of the picture on the picture display means;
The pattern change display is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern change display is stopped based on the stop operation means being operated. Picture display control means for controlling the display means (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the change display of the pattern, the corresponding execution of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Means (a function of executing a winning determination process, a medium providing process, and a process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
With
In the lottery process of the combination, the correspondence execution unit sets a predetermined correspondence combination (in the first to seventh embodiments, an index value IV in which first promotion replay winning data is set and second promotion replay winning data). The index value IV, the index value IV in which the bell winning data is set in the eighth embodiment, the index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set, and the index value IV in which the second promotion replay winning data is set) Based on the winning operation and the stop operation mode of the variation display of the pattern being a predetermined mode, predetermined corresponding execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S905 and S1005 in the main MPU 72) for executing the corresponding control )
In this gaming machine, the predetermined mode corresponding to any one of the predetermined mode and the mode for preventing the predetermined mode from being set when the predetermined corresponding role is won in the lottery process of the role in the advantageous section. The features B1 to B12, which are provided with a notification control means (a function of executing a notification control process in the main MPU 72 and a function of executing a notification process in the production side MPU 92) for executing the notification. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature B13, in the advantageous section, when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, the predetermined notification is executed. Therefore, by performing the stop operation in a mode corresponding to the predetermined notification, the corresponding profit is obtained. It is possible to obtain. In this case, the configuration of the feature B1 is provided, and the related processing can be executed by being in a predetermined game state and not in the advantageous section, thereby increasing the player's attention to the section that is not the advantageous section. Becomes possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B13, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. State transition for shifting the game state among a plurality of game states having different degrees of advantage (normal state ST1, BB state ST2, post-bonus state ST3, first preparation state ST4, second preparation state ST5, RT state ST6). Means (in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S704, S803, S902, S905, S906, S1002, S1005, S1007, S1307, S1602 and S1605 in the main MPU 72 In the second embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S2402, S2405 and S2408 in the main MPU 72)
Second section setting means (first implementation) for setting a game section to a second section (advantageous section) based on occurrence of a specific event (set of SB winning data) in a first section (normal section). In the embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S1411 in the main MPU 72, and in the sixth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S2804 in the main MPU 72)
With
It is a configuration that can stay in the second section in a plurality of types of gaming states,
The gaming machine executes the profit providing process in a mode corresponding to the gaming state at that time in a predetermined opportunity game that is a game after the game in which the specific event has occurred and is included in the second section. A gaming machine comprising processing execution means (a function of executing a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 in the main MPU 72).

  According to the feature C1, the progress of the game can be diversified by the presence of a plurality of types of game states and the presence of a plurality of types of game sections. In this case, when a specific event occurs in the first section, not only is the second section set, but also a process for providing profit is executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the specific event in the first section. In addition, the profit provision processing is executed in a predetermined opportunity game included in the second section, which is a game after the game in which the specific event has occurred. Thereby, the difference between the first section and the second section is made clear such that the first section is a section in which the profit providing process is not performed and the second section is a section in which the profit providing process can be performed. It is possible to do. In addition, the profit provision process is a game after the game in which the specific event has occurred, and is executed in a predetermined trigger game included in the second section in a mode corresponding to the gaming state at that time. This allows the player to pay attention not only to the occurrence of the specific event in the first section, but also to the type of game state in the subsequent second section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature C2. The gaming machine according to Feature C1, wherein the processing execution means changes the probability of the determination of the provision of the profit in the profit provision processing according to a gaming state in the predetermined trigger game.

  According to the feature C2, the probability that the profit is determined to be provided in the profit providing process differs depending on the type of the gaming state in the predetermined opportunity game, so that the player who expects to provide the profit in the first section Attention will be paid to the type of gaming state in the second section after the occurrence of the specific event.

  Feature C3. The game state at the time when the specific event occurs in the first section may be different from the game state at the time of the predetermined trigger game in the second section set based on the occurrence of the specific event. A gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2.

  According to the feature C3, the player pays attention not only to the game state in the first section, but also to the game state in the second section after a specific event has occurred in the first section.

Feature C4. The processing execution means determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (RT state ST6) or to shift to the advantageous gaming state in which it is easy to shift as the profit providing processing. To execute a decision process to
The state shifting means shifts the state to the advantageous game state or a state in which the state easily transitions to the advantageous game state based on the determination of the transition performed in the determination process. The gaming machine according to any one of C3.

  According to the feature C4, there is a possibility that the situation is the advantageous game state and the second section triggered by the occurrence of the specific event in the first section. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the specific event in the first section.

  Feature C5. The processing execution means may be configured so that the provision of a profit is not determined in the processing for providing a profit on at least one condition that a game state in the predetermined trigger game is a specific game state (a normal state ST1). The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that:

  According to the feature C5, when the gaming state in the predetermined opportunity game is the specific gaming state, the provision of the profit is not determined, so that even if a specific event occurs in the first section and the second section is set. It is possible to create a situation where no profit is given.

  Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the predetermined trigger game is a first game started in the second section set for the occurrence of the specific event.

  According to the feature C6, when the second section is set, it is possible to execute the profit provision processing early.

  Feature C7. Means for varying the end condition of the second section according to the result of the profit provision processing executed in response to the setting of the second section (in the first embodiment, steps S1901, S1904, Step S1905, Function to execute Step S1910 and Step S1913, Function to execute Step S2601, Step S2604, Step S2605, Step S2610 and Step S2613 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3001, S3004, S3005, and S3009 in the main MPU 72 is used. In the eighth embodiment, steps S3201, S3206, and step S in the main MPU 72 are performed. 3207, the gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C6, characterized in that it comprises a function) for executing the process of step S3213.

  According to the feature C7, the second section can be ended in a mode corresponding to the result of the profit provision processing, and the result of the profit provision processing can be associated with the continuation mode of the second section.

  Feature C8. In the case where the result of the profit providing process executed for the setting of the second section is a result not corresponding to the provision of the profit, the result of the profit providing process executed for the setting of the second section is Means for making the number of games executed in the second section smaller or more likely to be performed than when the result is a result corresponding to the provision of a profit (in the first embodiment, the step performed by the main MPU 72). A function of executing the processing of steps S1904 to S1906, a function of executing the processing of steps S2604 to S2606 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and a processing of steps S3206 to S3209 of the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment. A game machine according to any one of the features C1 to C7,

  According to the feature C8, it is possible to prevent the second section from continuing unnecessarily long in a situation where no profit is given.

  Feature C9. In the case where the result of the profit provision process executed in response to the setting of the second section is a result not corresponding to the provision of profit, the gaming state in the predetermined opportunity game in which the profit provision process is executed Any one of features C1 to C8, characterized by comprising means (function of executing an advantageous section ending process in the main-side MPU 72) according to the type of the second section. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C9, even in a situation where a profit is not provided, the second section can be ended in a mode corresponding to the type of the game state at that time, and the result of the profit providing process and the profit providing process It is possible to associate the continuation mode of the second section with the combination with the gaming state when is executed.

  Feature C10. Means for enabling the second section to end with the shortest number of games when the result of the profit provision processing executed in response to the setting of the second section is a result that does not correspond to provision of a profit. (In the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S1904 to S1906 in the main MPU 72, in the fourth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S2604 to S2606 in the main MPU 72, the eighth embodiment The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, further comprising a function of executing the processes of steps S3206 to S3209 in the main MPU 72.

  According to the feature C10, it is possible to minimize the number of games in which the second section continues in a situation where no profit is given. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the number of stay games in the entire second section from becoming unnecessarily long.

  Feature C11. If the result of the profit provision process executed in response to the setting of the second section is a result not corresponding to the provision of profit, the predetermined opportunity game in which the profit provision process has been executed is Means for ending the second section (the function of executing the processing of steps S1904 to S1906 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and the processing of steps S2604 to S2606 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment) The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, further comprising a function (in the eighth embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3206 to S3209 in the main MPU 72).

  According to the feature C11, it is possible to minimize the number of games in which the second section continues in a situation where no profit is given.

  Feature C12. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C11, wherein even if the specific event occurs in the second section, the profit providing process is not executed.

  According to the feature C12, when the specific event occurs in the first section, the profit providing process is executed. On the other hand, even when the specific event occurs in the second section, the profit providing process is not executed. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish the roles of the first section and the second section.

Feature C13. In the situation where the gaming state is the specific state (post-bonus state ST3), the state transition means switches from the specific state to another gaming state (first preparation state ST4) on at least one condition that the specific event has occurred. To migrate,
The processing execution unit may be configured to determine that the provision of a profit is determined in the profit providing process when the profit providing process is performed in response to the occurrence of the specific event in the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C12.

  According to the feature C13, when the specific state is reached, the game does not shift to another game state unless a specific event occurs, and when the profit giving process is executed when the specific event occurs in the specific state. Is determined to be given a profit. This increases the probability that a profit will be given in the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player for the specific state.

  Feature C14. When the first special game state (second BB state) advantageous to the player is finished, the subsequent state is set to the specific state and the first section (step S1805 in the main MPU 72). The gaming machine according to feature C13, further comprising:

  According to the feature C14, it is not only advantageous to the player when the first special game state is entered, but also after the end of the first special game state, the specific state and the first section. Therefore, the probability that the profit is given increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the occurrence of the first special gaming state.

Feature C15. Even if the specific event occurs in the second section, the profit providing process is not executed,
When the second special game state (first BB state) advantageous to the player is completed, the subsequent state is the specific state and the second section (step S1714 in the main MPU 72). The gaming machine according to feature C14, further comprising:

  According to the feature C15, although the second special game state is advantageous to the player when the second special game state is entered, the second special game state is in a specific state after the second special game state, and the second section is reached. Even if a specific event occurs in the second section, the profit provision processing is not executed. As a result, it is possible to give a difference in the degree of advantage regarding the probability of giving a profit between the first special game state and the second special game state, both of which are advantageous to the player.

  Feature C16. The gaming machine according to feature C15, wherein the profit provision process is not executed in the first special game state, and the profit provision process is executed in the second special game state.

  According to the feature C16, in the second special game state, the process for providing the profit is executed, and therefore, even in the second special game state, it is possible to provide an opportunity to be provided with the profit.

  Feature C17. The game according to any one of features C1 to C16, wherein the occurrence of the specific event includes winning a specific combination (index value IV in which SB winning data is set) in a lottery process of the combination. Machine.

  According to the feature C17, the player who expects the execution of the profit provision processing expects to win the specific combination in the combination lottery processing in the situation of the first section. This makes it easy for a player who expects the execution of the profit providing process to understand the target to be noted.

  Feature C18. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C17, wherein the probability that the specific event occurs is constant among a plurality of set values that provide a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature C18, it is possible to make the probability of shifting from the first section to the second section constant among a plurality of set values.

  Feature C19. In one of the first section and the second section, a privilege that does not occur in the other can be given to the player, or in one of the first section and the second section, a privilege is given to the player more than the other. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C18, wherein the gaming machine has an easy configuration.

  According to the feature C19, the player plays a game while expecting an advantageous game section.

  Feature C20. In the second section, a privilege that does not occur in the first section can be given to a player, or in the second section, a privilege is more easily given to a player than in the first section. Feature C1 A gaming machine according to any one of A19 to A19.

  According to the feature C20, if only the game section is compared, the second section is more advantageous than the first section. In this case, the provision of the feature C1 allows the profit providing process to be executed when a specific event occurs in the situation of the first section. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player for the situation that is the first section.

Feature C21. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
Combination lottery means for executing lottery processing of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means (function of executing lottery processing in the main MPU 72);
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the change display of the picture on the picture display means;
The pattern change display is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern change display is stopped based on the stop operation means being operated. Picture display control means for controlling the display means (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the change display of the pattern, the corresponding execution of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Means (a function of executing a winning determination process, a medium providing process, and a process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
With
In the lottery process of the combination, the correspondence execution unit sets a predetermined correspondence combination (in the first to seventh embodiments, an index value IV in which first promotion replay winning data is set and second promotion replay winning data). The index value IV, the index value IV in which the bell winning data is set in the eighth embodiment, the index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set, and the index value IV in which the second promotion replay winning data is set) Based on the winning operation and the stop operation mode of the variation display of the pattern being a predetermined mode, predetermined corresponding execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S905 and S1005 in the main MPU 72) for executing the corresponding control )
This gaming machine corresponds to one of the modes for preventing the predetermined mode and the predetermined mode from being set in the second section when the predetermined corresponding role is won in the lottery process of the role. Features C1 to C20 characterized by being provided with a notification control means (a function of executing a notification control process in the main MPU 72 and a function of executing a notification process in the production MPU 92) for executing the predetermined notification. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature C21, in the second section, the predetermined notification is executed when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination, so that the stop operation is performed in a mode corresponding to the predetermined notification to thereby obtain the corresponding profit. Can be obtained. In this case, the configuration of the feature C1 is provided, and when the specific event occurs in the first section, the process for providing the profit can be executed, so that the player's attention to the first section can be increased. .

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C21, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Advantageous section setting means for setting a game section as an advantageous section (a function of executing the processing of steps S1404, S1411, and S1414 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a step S2804 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment) Function to execute the process),
In the advantageous section, an advantageous gaming state (RT state ST6) that is advantageous to the player or a state where the transition to the advantageous gaming state is easy (a state in which the transition condition to the RT state ST6 is satisfied in the second preparation state ST5). (A function of executing the processing of steps S905 and S1005 in the main MPU 72)
An advantageous section ending means (a function of executing an advantageous section ending process in the main MPU 72) for executing an ending process of the advantageous section based on occurrence of an end trigger in the situation of the advantageous section;
With
A game machine characterized in that there are a plurality of types of the end trigger.

  According to the feature D1, since the transition to the advantageous game state or the state in which the transition to the advantageous game state is easy to occur occurs in the advantageous section, the player expecting the transition to the advantageous game state is set to the advantageous section. Will be noted. In this case, since there are a plurality of types of ending triggers for executing the ending process of the advantageous section, it is possible to diversify the ending mode of the advantageous section. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature D2. The method according to claim D1, wherein the state transition unit terminates the advantageous gaming state or transitions to a state in which a new transition to the advantageous gaming state is unlikely to occur when the termination processing is executed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D2, when the advantageous section ends, the advantageous gaming state ends, or the state shifts to a state in which a new transition to the advantageous gaming state is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the player will pay attention to when the advantageous section ends. In this case, since there are a plurality of types of opportunities for ending the advantageous section, it is possible to diversify the manner of ending the advantageous section that the player is paying attention to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to the features D1 or D2, wherein the end opportunity includes that the number of games executed in the advantageous section reaches a maximum number of games.

  According to the feature D3, the advantageous section is terminated based on the fact that the number of games continuously executed in the situation of the advantageous section has reached the upper limit number of games, so that the advantageous section does not continue excessively. can do.

Feature D4. The advantageous section end means includes:
First ending means for ending the advantageous section based on the fact that the number of games executed in the situation of the advantageous section has reached the upper limit game number (in the first embodiment, an affirmative determination is made in step S1910 in the main MPU 72) And the function of performing an affirmative determination in step S2610 of the main MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S2611 in the fourth embodiment).
Second ending means (first embodiment) for ending the advantageous section based on the occurrence of a transition of the gaming state in a situation where the number of games executed in the situation of the advantageous section is included in a predetermined game number range. In the embodiment, the function of making an affirmative determination in step S1913 in the main MPU 72 and executing the processing of step S1911 is provided. In the fourth embodiment, the affirmative determination is made in step S2613 of the main MPU 72 and performing the processing of step S2611. Function),
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, comprising:

  According to the feature D4, it is possible to diversify the end opportunity of the advantageous section in relation to the number of games executed in the situation of the advantageous section. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games executed in the advantageous section situation.

  Feature D5. The second ending means ends the advantageous section based on the transition of the advantageous gaming state in a situation where the number of games executed in the situation of the advantageous section is included in a predetermined game number range. The gaming machine according to feature D4, characterized in that:

  According to the feature D5, when the transition to the advantageous game state occurs in a situation where the number of games executed in the situation of the advantageous section is included in the predetermined game number range, the game is executed in the situation of the advantageous section. Even if the number of games has not reached the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section is ended. This makes it possible for the player to pay attention to the transition timing to the advantageous game state with respect to the number of games executed in the advantageous section situation.

  Feature D6. At least one condition that the situation that is the advantageous game state and is not the advantageous section has occurred is defined as the advantageous game state and the situation that is the advantageous section occurs but the advantageous game state is the advantageous game state. Unlike a case in which a non-section situation does not occur, a related process execution unit (to the RT state ST6 using a table for various states in the main MPU 72) that enables related processes related to the player's profit to be executed. The gaming machine according to Feature D5, further comprising a function of executing a transfer lottery process of the main MPU 72 and a function of executing a transfer lottery process to the RT state ST6 using an RT state table in the main MPU 72). .

  According to the feature D6, although the number of games executed in the situation of the advantageous section has not reached the upper limit number of games, the advantageous section has ended in relation to the transition timing to the advantageous gaming state. Even in such a case, a related process relating to the player's profit can be executed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling detrimental to the occurrence of such an event.

Feature D7. A process executing means (a function of executing a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 in the main MPU 72) for executing a process for providing a profit based on the setting in the advantageous section;
Means for making the end trigger of the advantageous section different according to the result of the profit provision processing executed for the setting of the advantageous section (in the first embodiment, steps S1901, S1904, and S1904 in the main MPU 72). A function for executing the processing of steps S1905, S1910, and S1913, a function for executing the processing of steps S2601, S2604, S2605, S2610, and S2613 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, a seventh embodiment In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3001, S3004, S3005, and S3009 in the main MPU 72, and in the eighth embodiment, the steps S3201, S3206, S3207, a function of executing the processing in step S3213),
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, comprising:

  According to the feature D7, the advantageous section can be ended in a mode corresponding to the result of the profit provision processing, and the result of the profit provision processing can be associated with the end mode of the advantageous section.

Feature D8. The process execution means executes, as the profit providing process, a determination process of determining whether to shift to the advantageous gaming state or to shift to an easy-to-advance gaming state. ,
The state transition means may transition the state to the advantageous game state or a state in which the state easily transitions to the advantageous game state based on the transition decision being made in the decision processing. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D8, the end opportunity of the advantageous section changes depending on whether or not there is a transition to the advantageous gaming state or a state where the transition to the advantageous gaming state is easy. This makes it possible to end the advantageous section in a manner suitable for each situation.

  Feature D9. The result of the profit provision process executed for the setting of the advantageous section is a result corresponding to provision of a profit (a notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R enabling the establishment of the first promotion replay winning). If so, means for continuing the advantageous section at least until the profit is given (in the first embodiment, the function of making a negative determination in step S1905 in the main MPU 72, the fourth embodiment) In the embodiment, the function of making a negative determination in step S2605 in the main MPU 72, in the seventh embodiment, the function of making a negative determination in step S3005 of the main MPU 72, and in the eighth embodiment, in step S3207 of the main MPU 72 The gaming machine according to feature D7 or D8, comprising a function of making a negative determination).

  According to the feature D9, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending in the middle of the determination of the provision of the profit.

  Feature D10. If the result of the profit providing process executed for the setting of the advantageous section is a result that does not correspond to the provision of the profit, the result of the profit providing process executed for the setting of the advantageous section is Means for reducing or easily reducing the number of games executed in the advantageous section compared to the case where the result corresponds to the provision of the profit (the function of making an affirmative determination in step S1905 in the main MPU 72, In the fourth embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step S2605 in the main MPU 72, in the seventh embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in step S2605, and in the eighth embodiment, the function of making a positive determination in the main MPU 72. (Function of making an affirmative determination in step S3207). Of the game machine.

  According to the feature D10, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from continuing unnecessarily long in a situation where no profit is given.

  Feature D11. If the result of the profit provision process executed in response to the setting of the advantageous section is a result not corresponding to the provision of the profit, according to the type of the game state in the game in which the profit provision process is executed. Means for differentiating the end trigger of the advantageous section (the function of executing the processing of steps S1901 to S1907 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and the functions of steps S2601 to S2607 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment) A function of executing processing, a function of executing the processing of steps S3001 to S3007 in the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of steps S3201 to S3211 in the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment) Any of features D7 to D10 characterized by having Or gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature D11, even in a situation where a profit is not provided, the advantageous section can be ended in a mode corresponding to the type of the game state at that time, and the result of the profit providing process and the profit providing process are completed. The end mode of the advantageous section can be associated with the combination with the gaming state when executed.

  Feature D12. In the case where the result of the profit provision processing executed in response to the setting of the advantageous section is a result not corresponding to the provision of the profit, means for enabling the advantageous section to be completed with the shortest number of games (mainly The function of making an affirmative determination in step S1905 in the side MPU 72, the function of making an affirmative determination in step S2605 of the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and the affirmative determination in step S2605 of the main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment. The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D11, further comprising a function of performing an affirmative determination in step S3207 of the main-side MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment.

  According to the feature D12, it is possible to minimize the number of games in which the advantageous section continues in a situation where no profit is given. This makes it possible to prevent the number of stay games in the entire advantageous section from becoming unnecessarily long.

  Feature D13. If the result of the profit providing process executed in response to the setting of the advantageous section is a result not corresponding to the provision of the profit, the advantageous section is ended in the game in which the profit providing process is executed. Means (function of making an affirmative determination in step S1905 of main MPU 72, function of making a positive determination in step S2605 of main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and step S2605 of main MPU 72 in the seventh embodiment The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D12, further comprising a function of making an affirmative determination).

  According to the feature D13, it is possible to minimize the number of games in which the advantageous section continues in a situation where no profit is given.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features D1 to D13, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A picture display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying pictures;
Start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
Combination lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) for performing a lottery process of a combination based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the change display of the pattern on the pattern display means;
The pattern change display is started based on the start operation means being operated and a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the pattern change display is stopped based on the stop operation means being operated. Picture display control means for controlling the display means (function of executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination in the lottery process of the combination is displayed after the change display of the pattern, the corresponding execution of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is executed as the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination is established. Means (a function of executing a winning determination process, a medium providing process, and a process at the end of the game in the main MPU 72);
With
In the lottery process of the combination, the correspondence execution unit sets a predetermined correspondence combination (in the first to seventh embodiments, an index value IV in which first promotion replay winning data is set and second promotion replay winning data). The index value IV, the index value IV in which the bell winning data is set in the eighth embodiment, the index value IV in which the first promotion replay winning data is set, and the index value IV in which the second promotion replay winning data is set) Based on the winning operation and the stop operation mode of the variation display of the pattern being a predetermined mode, predetermined corresponding execution means (a function of executing the processes of steps S905 and S1005 in the main MPU 72) for executing the corresponding control ),
When the game section is an advantageous section, the predetermined mode corresponding to one of the modes for preventing the predetermined mode and the predetermined mode from being the predetermined mode when the predetermined corresponding role is won in the lottery process of the role. Notification control means for executing notification (function of executing notification control processing in main MPU 72, function of executing notification processing in staging MPU 92);
Restriction setting means for setting the restriction status in the advantageous section (the function of executing the processing of steps S1306 and S1506 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, the processing of step S2511 in the main MPU 72 in the third embodiment) A function to be executed, a function to execute the processing of step S2707 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment, and a function to execute the processing in step S2906 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment)
With
The notification control means does not execute the predetermined notification even if the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination when the restriction state is set even in the advantageous section. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature E1, the predetermined notification is executed when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination when the game section becomes the advantageous section, and the player performs the stop operation in a mode corresponding to the predetermined notification. Can be performed. As a result, the player expects the game section to be an advantageous section, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, when the restriction status is set, the predetermined notification is not executed even in the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the predetermined notification is not executed even in the advantageous section, and it is possible to appropriately control the game section.

Feature E2. A process executing means (a function of executing a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 in the main MPU 72) for executing a process for providing a profit based on the setting in the advantageous section;
The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the restriction setting means sets the restriction state when the result of the profit provision processing does not correspond to the provision of the profit.

  According to the feature E2, the profit provision processing is executed based on the setting of the advantageous section, so that it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the gaming section becomes the advantageous section. In this case, if the result of the profit providing process is not a result corresponding to the provision of the profit, it is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from being executed by setting the restriction status. , It is possible to cause a situation in which the game section is maintained in the advantageous section even if the result does not correspond to.

Feature E3. Advantageous section setting means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the process of step S1414 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment) for setting the game section to the advantageous section when the transition to the special game state (first BB state) occurs. Prepared,
The process execution means is configured to execute the profit providing process when the execution is triggered in the special game state,
The restriction setting means may be configured such that, if the profit provision process that results in provision of a profit in the special game state is not executed, the game state after the end of the special game state is the advantageous section. The gaming machine according to claim E2, wherein the restriction state is set.

  According to the feature E3, when the transition to the special game state occurs, the game section is set as the advantageous section, and the execution of the profit in the special game state is performed, so that the process for providing the profit is executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation that the transition to the special game state will occur. In addition, when the profit provision process that results in the provision of the profit in the special game state is not performed, the game state after the end of the special game state is an advantageous section, and the restriction state is set. State. Thereby, while the advantageous section is maintained even after the end of the special game state, the end of the special game state if the profit giving process that results in the corresponding profit is not executed. It is possible to prevent the predetermined notification from being executed in the later advantageous section.

Feature E4. Advantageous section setting means (main in the first embodiment, which sets a game section to the advantageous section based on the occurrence of a specific event (set of SB winning data) in a section where the gaming section is not the advantageous section. (The function of executing the processing of step S1411 in the side MPU 72, the function of executing the processing of step S2804 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment).
The gaming machine according to the features E2 or E3, wherein said processing execution means does not execute said profit provision processing even when said specific event occurs in said advantageous section.

  According to the feature E4, the gaming section is set as the advantageous section based on the fact that the specific event has occurred in the section that is not the advantageous section. Then, with the configuration of the above-described feature E2, the profit provision process is executed based on the fact that the game section is set as the advantageous section. Thus, the player expects a specific event to occur in a section that is not an advantageous section. Further, even if a specific event occurs in the advantageous section, the profit providing process is not executed. Accordingly, by setting the situation as an advantageous section and a restricted situation, it is possible to generate a situation in which the predetermined notification is not executed and the profit-giving process is not executed even if a specific event occurs.

Feature E5. In a situation where the gaming state is a specific state (post-bonus state ST3), the occurrence of a specific event (set of SB winning data) has occurred as at least one condition from the specific state to another gaming state (first preparation state). ST4) (a function of executing the process of step S803 in the main MPU 72).
The processing execution unit may be configured to determine that the provision of a profit is determined in the profit providing process when the profit providing process is performed in response to the occurrence of the specific event in the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E4.

  According to the feature E5, when a specific state occurs, the game does not shift to another game state unless a specific event occurs, and a profit-providing process is executed in response to the specific event occurring in the specific state. Is determined to be given a profit. This increases the probability that a profit will be given in the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player for the specific state.

  Feature E6. The gaming machine according to features E4 or E5, wherein the occurrence of the specific event includes winning the specific combination (index value IV in which the SB winning data is set) in the lottery processing of the combination.

  According to the feature E6, the player who expects the execution of the profit provision processing expects to win the specific combination in the lottery processing of the combination. This makes it easy for a player who expects the execution of the profit providing process to understand the target to be noted.

Feature E7. In another gaming state (second preparation state ST5), if the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination and the stop operation mode is the predetermined mode, the gaming state is advantageous to the player. State transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S1005 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning to a favorable gaming state (RT state ST6),
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the predetermined notification is a notification for setting the stop operation mode to the predetermined mode.

  According to the feature E7, the predetermined notification is executed when the predetermined corresponding combination is won in the lottery process of the combination in the advantageous section, and the gaming state is changed to the advantageous gaming state by performing the stop operation in a mode corresponding to the predetermined notification. Transition. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the predetermined section will be executed as an advantageous section.

  Feature E8. In the other gaming state and in the situation of the advantageous section, based on the fact that the predetermined corresponding combination was won in the lottery process of the combination but the stop operation mode did not become the predetermined mode, the advantageous section was determined. (The function of executing the processing of step S1902 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S2602 in the main MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment, and the function of executing the processing in the seventh embodiment. The gaming machine according to Feature E7, further comprising a function of executing the processing of Step S3002 in the side MPU 72, and a function of executing the processing of Step S3203 in the main MPU 72 in the eighth embodiment.

  According to the feature E8, when the stop operation mode does not become the predetermined mode in the winning section lottery process in the situation of the advantageous section, not only the transition to the advantageous game state does not occur but also The advantageous section ends. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the predetermined section will be executed as an advantageous section.

  Feature E9. If the game section is not the advantageous section, the predetermined notification is not executed even if the predetermined corresponding role is won in the lottery process of the role in the other game state, wherein the predetermined notification is not executed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature E9, in the case of a non-advantage section, the predetermined notification is not executed even if the player wins the predetermined corresponding role, so that it is possible to increase the player's expectation of becoming the advantageous section.

  In addition, for the configuration of the features E1 to E9, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic F group>
Feature F1. Processing executing means for executing a process for providing a profit based on the setting of the gaming section from the first section (normal section) to the second section (advantageous section) (executing a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 in the main MPU 72) Function), and
In a situation where the game section is the first section, a section setting means (the first side in the first embodiment) that causes the game section to be the second section after a predetermined profit (first BB state) is provided. A function of executing the process of step S1414 in the MPU 72);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature F1, when a predetermined profit is given in the situation of the first section, the subsequent game section is set to the second section and the first section is set to the second section. A process for giving a profit is executed based on this. Thereby, when a predetermined profit is provided, a profit providing process based on the setting from the first section to the second section can be further executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player for giving the predetermined profit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. The section setting means is configured such that when a special game state (first BB state) advantageous to a player is started as the provision of the predetermined profit, the game section is the second section. The gaming machine according to Feature F1.

  According to the feature F2, when a special game state advantageous to the player occurs, not only that, but the game section is set as the second section. Then, the profit providing process is executed based on the setting for the second section. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the start of the special game state.

  Feature F3. When the special game state is started in the first section and set in the second section, the processing execution means executes the profit providing processing when the special game state is started. The gaming machine according to Feature F2.

  According to the feature F3, when the special game state occurs and the game section is set to the second section, the profit providing process is executed at the start of the special game state. Thereby, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player at the timing when the special game state is started.

  Feature F4. The process execution means is configured to provide the profit based on the execution trigger (winning at the index value IV = 2 or 3 in the BB state ST2) in the special game state and the second section. The gaming machine according to Feature F3, wherein the gaming machine executes a process for use.

  According to the feature F4, the profit giving process is executed not only at the timing when the special game state is started but also after the start of the special game state due to the execution trigger. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only at the start of the special game state but also after the start.

  Feature F5. The processing execution means may be configured to execute the execution trigger when the special profit provision (transition to RT state ST6) is not determined in the profit provision processing executed when the special game state is started. The gaming machine according to Feature F4, wherein the profit providing process is executed based on the occurrence.

  According to the feature F5, on the condition that the provision of the special profit has not been determined in the profit provision processing at the start of the special game state, the profit provision processing is executed in response to the subsequent execution trigger. . As a result, it is possible to prevent the grant of the special profit from occurring repeatedly.

  Feature F6. In the situation where the special profit has already been determined to be provided by the profit provision processing, the processing execution means is in the special game state and is in the second section, and is executed (the index value IV = BB in the BB state ST2). The feature F3 to F5 is characterized by executing a process (allowing the main MPU 72 to increase the continuation rate) based on the occurrence of the winning in 2 or 3). A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature F6, when the provision of the special profit is determined in the processing for providing the profit at the start of the special game state, the specific profit can be provided based on the execution trigger occurring after the start. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention not only at the start of the special game state but also after the start.

  Feature F7. Any of the features F2 to F6, wherein, when the special game state is started in the second section, the processing execution means does not execute the profit provision processing when the special game state is started. 2. The gaming machine according to item 1.

  According to the feature F7, when the special game state is started in the situation where the second section is already being performed, the profit providing process is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to increase the advantage for starting the special game state in the situation of the first section.

  Feature F8. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7, wherein the probability that the predetermined profit is given is constant among a plurality of set values that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature F8, the profit provision process is executed when the predetermined profit having a constant provision probability is provided between the set values in a plurality of stages, so that the execution frequency of the profit provision process is different between the set values. Advantages or disadvantages are less likely to occur.

Feature F9. Means for setting the gaming state after the predetermined profit has been given to a specific state (post-bonus state ST3) (a function of executing the processing of step S1714 in the main MPU 72);
In a situation in which the gaming state is the specific state, a transition from the specific state to another gaming state (first preparation state ST4) is made as at least one condition that a specific event (SB winning data is set) has occurred. Means (the function of executing the process of step S803 in the main MPU 72);
With
The section setting means causes the game section to be the second section based on the occurrence of the specific event in the situation of the first section,
The processing execution means may be configured to determine that the special benefit is to be provided in the profit providing process when the profit providing process is performed in response to the occurrence of the specific event in the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F8, characterized in that:

  According to the feature F9, when a specific state is established after a predetermined profit is given, the game does not shift to another game state unless a specific event occurs, and a specific event occurs in a situation of the first section. Is the second section based on Then, when a specific event occurs in the specific state and the game section is changed from the first section to the second section and the profit providing process is executed, the provision of the special profit is determined. That is, when the game section after the predetermined profit is provided is the first section, the probability that the special profit is provided increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the fact that the game section after the predetermined profit is given is the first section.

  Feature F10. A means (function of making a negative determination in step S1413 in the main MPU 72) so that the game section after the profit (the second BB state) different from the predetermined profit is given is the first section. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein

  According to the feature F10, the second section is provided when the predetermined profit is provided, whereas the game section after the provision of a profit different from the predetermined profit is maintained in the first section. Further, even if the different profits are given, the transition of the game section from the first section to the second section does not occur, so that the profit giving processing is not executed when the different profits are given. Absent. Accordingly, it is possible to change the setting mode of the game section according to the type of the profit to be provided, and also to change the execution mode of the profit providing process.

  Feature F11. The gaming machine according to Feature F10, wherein the probability that the different profits are provided differs between a first set value and a second set value that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature F11, since the profit providing process is not executed when the profit having different providing probabilities is provided between the first set value and the second set value, the advantage frequency between the set values is advantageous with respect to the execution frequency of the profit providing process. Alternatively, it is possible to reduce disadvantages.

Feature F12. Means for setting the game state after the different profits have been given to a specific state (post-bonus state ST3) (a function of executing the processing of step S1805 in the main MPU 72);
In a situation in which the gaming state is the specific state, a transition from the specific state to another gaming state (first preparation state ST4) is made as at least one condition that a specific event (SB winning data is set) has occurred. Means (the function of executing the process of step S803 in the main MPU 72);
With
The section setting means causes the game section to be the second section based on the occurrence of the specific event in the situation of the first section,
The processing execution means may be configured to determine that the special benefit is to be provided in the profit providing process when the profit providing process is performed in response to the occurrence of the specific event in the specific state. The gaming machine according to Feature F10 or F11, characterized in that:

  According to the feature F12, when the specific state is set after the different profits are given, the game does not shift to another game state unless a specific event occurs, and the specific event occurs in the first section. Is the second section based on Then, when a specific event occurs in the specific state and the game section is changed from the first section to the second section and the profit providing process is executed, the provision of the special profit is determined. In the first section, the game section after the different profits are provided is maintained in the first section. As a result, when the different profits are provided, the probability that the special benefit is subsequently provided increases. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player for giving the different profits.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F12, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic G group>
Feature G1. In a situation where the game section is the first section (normal section), the game section is set as the second section (advantageous section) on the assumption that a specific event (SB winning data is set) has occurred at least as one condition. Section setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S1411 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S2804 in the main MPU 72 in the sixth embodiment);
A process executing means for executing a process for providing a profit based on the setting of the game zone as the second zone (a function of executing a lottery process for shifting to the RT state ST6 in the main MPU 72);
In a situation where the gaming state is the specific state (post-bonus state ST3), state transition means (at the time of the occurrence of the specific event as at least one condition, transitioning from the specific state to another gaming state (first preparation state ST4)). A function of executing the process of step S803 in the main MPU 72);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature G1, the game section is set to the second section on the condition that the specific event has occurred in the situation of the first section at least as one condition. Then, the profit provision process is executed based on the fact that the game section is set to the second section. Thereby, in the first section, the player plays the game while expecting a specific event to occur. In addition, the game state shifts from the specific state to another game state on the assumption that a specific event has occurred in the situation where the game state is the specific state. That is, the condition that the game section shifts from the first section to the second section and the condition that the game state shifts from the specific state to another game state overlap as the occurrence of the specific event. Accordingly, it is possible to cause a situation in which the game section shifts from the first section to the second section based on the occurrence of the specific event and the game state shifts from the specific state to another game state, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be achieved.

  Feature G2. A condition for setting the game section from the first section to the second section by the section setting means, and a state of the game being shifted from the specific state to the another game state by the state shift means. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the condition is common in that the specific event needs to occur, but differs in other respects.

  According to the feature G2, when a specific event occurs, both the setting from the first section to the second section and the transition from the specific state to another game state occur, and only one of these occurs. Can be caused. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the setting status of the combination of the game section and the game state.

  Feature G3. The game setting section is set from the first section to the second section by the section setting means, and the game state is changed from the specific state to the another game state by the state shifting means. The feature G1 or G2 is characterized in that one occurs when the specific event occurs, and the other occurs when the specific event occurs and another event (SB winning does not hold) occurs. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature G3, when only a specific event occurs, only one of the setting from the first section to the second section and the transition from the specific state to another game state occurs, and the specific event and another event When both occur, both the setting from the first section to the second section and the transition from the specific state to another game state occur. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the setting status of the combination of the game section and the game state.

  Feature G4. The processing execution unit may be configured to determine that the provision of a profit is determined in the profit providing process when the profit providing process is performed in response to the occurrence of the specific event in the specific state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3.

  According to the feature G4, when a specific state occurs, the game does not shift to another game state unless a specific event occurs, and when a profit providing process is executed in response to the specific event occurring in the specific state. Is determined to be given a profit. This increases the probability that a profit will be given in the specific state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the player for the specific state.

  Feature G5. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, wherein the state transition unit sets a game state after a predetermined profit (BB state ST2) is given to the specific state.

  According to the feature G5, the gaming state after the predetermined profit is provided becomes the specific state, and in the specific state, the game state shifts to another gaming state on the assumption that a specific event has occurred at least as one condition. In addition, the game section is set from the first section to the second section under at least one condition that a specific event has occurred, and the profit provision processing is executed based on the setting in the second section. As a result, after the predetermined profit is provided, the game section is set as the second section, and the specific state is present as a game state in which the game section stays until the processing for providing the profit is executed. Can be associated with each other in a configuration where each exists.

Feature G6. The section setting means,
A first setting unit (a function of making a negative determination in step S1413 in the main MPU 72) so that the game section after the predetermined profit is provided is the first section;
A second setting unit (a function of executing the process of step S1414 in the main MPU 72) so that the game section after the predetermined profit is provided is the second section;
The gaming machine according to Feature G5, comprising:

  According to the feature G6, in a configuration in which the game state after the predetermined profit is provided is the specific state, the case where the game section after the predetermined profit is provided is the first section and the case where the game section is the second section And exists. Thereby, when the specific event occurs in the specific state, the game section is set from the first section to the second section and the process for providing the profit is executed, and the game section is maintained in the second section and the profit is provided. And a situation in which the usage process is not executed.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or G6, wherein the predetermined profit is a special gaming state (BB state ST2) advantageous to the player.

  According to the feature G7, after the special game state advantageous to the player ends, the game state becomes the specific state, a specific event occurs in the specific state, and the game section is set from the first section to the second section. In this case, a process for providing profit is executed. This makes it possible to collect advantageous situations for the player in a short period of time.

Feature G8. As the predetermined profit, there are a first predetermined profit (second BB state) and a second predetermined profit (first BB state),
The first setting means causes the game section after the first predetermined profit is given to be the first section,
The gaming machine according to feature G6 or G7, wherein the second setting means sets the game section after the second predetermined profit is provided to be the second section.

  According to the feature G8, there is a case where the game section after the predetermined profit is provided is the first section and a case where the game section is the second section according to the type of the profit provided as the predetermined profit. Thereby, as a situation after the predetermined profit is given, it is possible to generate a situation that is the first section in the specific state and a situation that is the second section in the specific state, Each of these situations can be associated with the type of profit given as a predetermined profit. Therefore, the game situation can be diversified, and even if the game situation is diversified, the setting contents of each situation can be made easy for the player to understand.

Feature G9. The second setting means sets the game section from the first section to the second section when the second predetermined profit is provided in the first section,
The processing execution means may execute the profit providing processing based on the game section being set from the first section to the second section when the second predetermined profit is provided. The gaming machine according to Feature G8, wherein

  According to the feature G9, when the second predetermined profit is provided in the first section, the second predetermined profit is set in the second section even when the specific event has not occurred, and the profit is set in the second section. An application process is performed. Thus, when the second predetermined profit is awarded, it is possible to secure an opportunity to execute the profit providing process even if the situation is the specific state and the first section does not occur.

Feature G10. The probability that the first predetermined profit is given is different between a first set value and a second set value that give a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine,
The gaming machine according to Feature G9, wherein the probability that the second predetermined profit is provided is constant among a plurality of set values that provide a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature G10, the profit provision process is not executed when the first predetermined profit having different provision probabilities differs between the first set value and the second set value, and the provision probability is not performed between the set values in a plurality of stages. By executing the profit providing process triggered by the provision of the second predetermined profit which is constant, it becomes possible to prevent the advantage or disadvantage between the set values regarding the execution frequency of the profit providing process from occurring.

  Feature G11. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G10, wherein a probability that the specific event occurs is constant among a plurality of types of set values that provide a difference in the advantage of the gaming machine.

  According to the feature G11, the profit-giving process is executed when the specific event whose occurrence probability is constant among the set values of the plurality of stages is executed, so that there is an advantage between the set values regarding the execution frequency of the profit-giving process. Alternatively, it is possible to reduce disadvantages.

  Feature G12. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G11, wherein the specific event includes winning the specific combination in the lottery process of the combination.

  According to the feature G12, the player who expects the execution of the profit provision processing expects to win the specific combination by the lottery processing of the combination in the situation of the first section. This makes it easy for a player who expects the execution of the profit providing process to understand the target to be noted.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features G1 to G12, any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B13, the features C1 to C21, the features D1 to D13, the features E1 to E9, the features F1 to F12, and the features G1 to G12. One or a plurality of configurations may be applied. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  According to the inventions relating to the feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, the feature group E, the feature group F, and the feature group G, the following problems can be solved. It is.

  As one type of gaming machine, there is a slot machine. The slot machine has a plurality of reels, and a part of a plurality of symbols provided on an outer peripheral portion of each reel is configured to be visible through a display window. When the player bets a game medium such as a medal and operates a start lever, each reel starts rotating, and after each reel starts rotating, each reel is sequentially stopped by operating a stop button.

  In addition, inside the slot machine, a lottery is performed on condition that a game medium bet and the operation of the start lever are operated, and the result of the lottery is a winning, and a symbol in which the player has won on a predetermined activated line is displayed. A predetermined number of game media may be paid out on condition that the game media is stopped.

  Here, in the gaming machines as exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  Note that the above problem is not limited to the slot machine, but also applies to, for example, a gaming machine using a game ball as a game medium.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, gaming ball firing means for firing a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path for guiding the fired game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of game components arranged in a region; and a bonus is provided to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the game components.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: the rotation of the orbiting body is started based on the operation of the starting operation means, the rotation of the orbiting body is stopped based on the operation of the stopping operation means, and the player is operated according to the pattern after the stoppage. A gaming machine that grants benefits.

  10 slot machine, 31 reel unit, 41 start lever, 42 to 44 stop button, 72 main MPU, 92 directing MPU, ST1 normal state, ST2 BB state, ST3 bonus state, ST4: First preparation state, ST5: Second preparation state, ST6: RT state.

Claims (2)

State transition means for transitioning a gaming state between a plurality of types of gaming states having different degrees of advantage,
Second situation setting means for setting the game situation to the second situation based on the occurrence of the specific event in the first situation;
With
It is a configuration that can stay in the second situation in a plurality of types of gaming states,
The gaming machine executes a profit giving process corresponding to the gaming state at that time in a predetermined trigger game that is the first game started in the second situation set for the occurrence of the specific event. A processing execution means,
The game state at the time when the specific event occurs in the first situation may be different from the game state at the time of the predetermined trigger game in the second situation set based on the occurrence of the specific event. Yes,
A gaming machine characterized in that the processing execution means is configured such that, when the gaming state in the predetermined opportunity game is a specific gaming state, the provision of a profit is not determined in the processing for providing a profit. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is played using a game medium.

Images